Cass DS 15 32)
"at eat
| ae
CopnightNO__ + bY
COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT:
EVERYMAN’S GARDEN
IN WARTIME
EVERYMAN’S GARDEN
IN WARTIME
BY , on
CHARLES A: SELDEN
NEW YORK
DODD, MEAD AND COMPANY
1917
Copyricnut, 1913, py
DODD, MEAD AND COMPANY
(Under title of ““Everyman’s Garden Every Week’’)
CopyRicHtT, 1917, By
DODD, MEAD AND COMPANY, Inc.
©c1 4460726
Wr? { ‘
TO
MICHAELANGELO FRIERI
Whose years of loyal and cheerful cooperation,
whose garden sense, inherited from many
generations in the vineyards of
his ancestors in Italy, made
possible and profitable
the farm and garden
of an amateur in
New Jersey.
PREFACE FOR 1917
Ws
Amateur gardening, which was formerly one of
the gentler pastimes, like fishing, has become now a
matter of stern duty and grim necessity. To feed
the civilized world is the huge task that confronts
the United States this year; and every American who
cultivates a garden plot is “doing his bit” for his
country and for civilization. They also are soldiers
who fight with hoe and garden fork as well as those
who carry rifles.
Successful gardening requires more than good
intentions. All the energy and industry a man can
give to it will probably result in failure, unless his
efforts are intelligently directed. Ground that is
spaded up with high hopes will yield little beyond a
lame back and sore hands unless the gardener knows
how and when to plant and cultivate. Acres of land
and bushels of seed will be wasted this year for the
lack of one thing—knowledge.
With the purpose of reducmg waste and disap-
pointment, and with the aim of helping the amateur
gardener to bring forth fruits “some an hundred
PREFACE
fold, some sixty and some thirty” this book is written.
Based on long experience of what has been done and
can be done, it is a practical book, and the author’s
aim is always to convey his information in a clear,
simple and practical manner. It is_ especially
adapted for the help of the suburbanite, the man who
with his own hands is cultivating a piece of land and
who, for his own sake, and for the sake of all of us,
wants to get the best results from his efforts.
PREFACE
fp
HOW .THE BOOK: Fits. THE CAL D EN
Save for the parts on all-the-season matters, such
as preparation of the soil, fertilizing, protection
against pests, and the pocketbook advantage of rais-
ing your own vegetables, the chapters of this book
are placed in chronological order, with reference to
the many things to be done in a garden in the course
of a year, listed, for the most part, under the weeks
in which they best may be done.
An amplified table of contents affords suggestions
as to what should be attended to in any given period
and is intended to be a guide in planning, not only
for the moment, but for any future time in the life
of the garden. This is supplemented by the sum-
marized calendars and for quick reference to any
particular fruit or vegetable or fertilizing formula,
or to any specific piece of work, there is an index.
With such slight rearrangement and editing as
PREFACE
were necessary for transfer from magazine to book
the material is the same as it appeared through all
the growing weeks of the year in The Country Gen-
tleman. Putting it between covers is in response to
requests from readers of that periodical; with the
writer’s acknowledgment to the Curtis Publishing
Company of its courtesy in permitting him to com-
ply with those requests.
C. A. 5S.
CONTENTS
&
CHAPTER I
Corp WratHerR PLANNING AND READING . « .
Garden of the winter vision—Air castles built of the
illustrated seed catalogues—Real value of trying to
raise things that will match the pictures—Shape of
patch and arrangement of varieties—Government
is ready to help the possessor of the smallest gar-
den.
CHAPTER II
Sie THE Famity Purse . . Sa
Some simple household arithmetic shawriine he ex-
travagance of paying top prices for wilted vege-
tables from store or cart when the fresh product
can be had ai the trivial cost of seed—Food that
makes for health—An all-year supply—How to
raise potatoes.
CHAPTER III
GarRDEN Sorts, Goop anp Bap. . . :
Ground that needs barnyard manure and that nich
is better served by the easily handled chemical
fertilizer—Detecting and remedying sourness of
soil—What loam is.
CHAPTER IV
Toots TuHat Are EssENnTIAL Ae MM ae VaNN PS tc Oh fe Oy eae
A hoe is not a good hoe unless it just suits the gar-
dener who uses it—High value of the human
fingers in the war on weeds—Weeders with short
handles—Many useless things.
1x
12
19
28
CONTENTS
CHAPTER V
- 388
° e ° ° e
GarDEN EvceEnics
Plants must be well born and have decent growing
conditions from the start—Drain the mud holes—
Ditch construction—Insect and fungous enemies
classified—Ways to fight them.
CHAPTER VI
Water WHENEVER NEEDED ah) ale
Gardens that are ruined needlessly because their
owners depend upon rain alone—Simple and in-
expensive methods of irrigation for small areas—
The part that moisture plays in plant growth.
CHAPTER VII
GarpeN Mistakes or Various Sorts 63
Every grower should make an honestly complete
record of all the blunders he has been guilty of—
A useful chart for doing better work in the next
garden—Sample grouping of errors.
CHAPTER VIII
Taxing PLtantine Cures rrom Nature. . 17
Blossoming of the fruit trees is a surer sign for
the beginning of garden work than the arbitrary
say-so of the almanac—The number of days avail-
able—Rules for all vegetables.
CHAPTER IX
87
Aprit—Tuer First Wrerex os bilge ee :
Starting a new strawberry patch—Care of the old
one—Save the winter’s wood ashes for the potash
—Planting in hills or matted rows—Handling of
runners—Fertile and sterile plants.
x
CONTENTS
CHAPTER X
SOR oIer tt) aay
Aprit—TuHE Seconp Weex
Things easy to raise but too often missing from the
amateur garden because of fancied difficulties—
Making the asparagus bed—Celery from the plant-
ing of seed to blanching of stalks—Onion sets.
CHAPTER XI
115
Aprit—Ture Tuirp WEEK .
The small fruit garden—Setting ue blackberries,
raspberries, currants and gooseberries—Selecting
site and preparing the soil—Cultivation—Fertilizer
best adapted to each variety.
CHAPTER XII
126
Aprit—TuHE Tuirp Week, Continvep
Setting out fruit trees—Beware of the travelling
agent—Go direct to the nurseryman—Advantages
of the dwarf trees in the small garden—Fertilizers
for the several varieties—Unusual fruits
CHAPTER XIII
act Ca
ApriL—TuHE Fourtn Week
Lettuce will head up and have a ue if you get
the right variety and handle it properly—Nitrate
of soda for quick growth and a crisp plant—
Cabbage and cauliflower
CHAPTER XIV
151
May—Tue First Harr
Sweet corn culture—Selection of seed—Much hoeing
and then more hoeing are necessary—Old sod land
makes the ideal soil—Rapid growth in hot weather
—There is an ideal way for beans.
xl
CONTENTS
CHAPTER XV
May—Tue Seconp Harr ../. .. .
Methods for raising the perfect melon—The advan-
tage of using glass boxes in the garden for getting
an early crop—Manure at the bottoms of the hills
—Cures for blight—Rules for cucumbers—The bor-
der of parsley.
CHAPTER XVI
JuNeE—Tue First Harr SO UNDA DF gaan ae
Tomatoes, eggplants and peppers—Three essentials
of the complete garden that need genial conditions
of growth and much care for their best develop-
ment—Ancient history of the tomato.
CHAPTER XVII
JuNE—TuHE Sreconp Hatr
After the staples are all safely en sane in a
garden novelty or two—How to raise peanuts and
what they really are—Gourds that will grow any-
where—Sweet potatoes.
CHAPTER XVIII
Juty—Tue First Wrex
With the end of June comes the business of canning
vegetables for the winter—Rules for the different
varieties—Best time of day for picking the product
that is to be kept in glass,
CHAPTER XIX
Juty—Tuer Sreconpn WEEK
The period for finishing, touches, especially in the
flower garden—Filling in of empty spaces—Lib-
eral use of liquid manure for the purpose of bring-
ing out the color of the blossoms—Hollyhocks,
Xil
161
171
180
189
199
CONTENTS
CHAPTER XX
- 210
Juty—Tue Tuirp Week .
Root crops and their midsummer treatment—The
main potato crop and dangers that menace the
vines—Preliminary fertilizing—Carrots, beets, tur-
nips and rutabaga.
CHAPTER XXI
. 219
Juty—Tue Fourta Werx
Midsummer possibilities for new planting almost as
enticing as those of April and May—More peas and
lettuce—Kohl-rabi and corn—Reward for the man
who raises endive.
CHAPTER XXII
~« 229
Aveust—Tue First Weex ;
The garden as a continuous institution and a policy
of annual improvement of its soil—Pick out the
poorest part of the patch for renovation and plant
it now to clover or alfalfa.
CHAPTER XXIII
236
Aveust—Tue Srconp Week
Pickling, drying and preserving the late summer
surplus of the garden—Do not use store chili sauce
—Many things that can be done with tomatoes—
A long list of grape products.
CHAPTER XXIV
246
Aveust—Tue Tuirp WEEK
Making a new lawn—Renovating the old one—Select
grass seed that is suitable for the particular place
in which it is to be sown—The important matter
of contours and paths and shrubs.
Xi
CONTENTS
CHAPTER XXV
Auaust—Tue FourtH WrrExk
Make selections of shrubs and vines for the Fall
planting to improve permanently the general ap-
pearance of the place—Things that are beautiful
the year round—A sample grouping.
CHAPTER XXVI
SEPTEMBER Sn Wy :
End of the “putting-up” season—Best time to pick
fruit—Storage for the root crops—Different tem-
peratures needed by different varieties of vege-
tables but all must be kept dry.
CHAPTER XXVII
SePpTEMBER—CONTINUED .
Setting out grape vines—Compromise plan to get
both fruit and foliage—Cuttings and layerings—
Use of the vine for screening purposes—The sev-
eral methods of grafting.
CHAPTER XXVIII
OcToBER AND NovEeEMBER BRAD FS
Not a period for loafing in the flower garden—Put-
ting the hardy bulbs in the ground—Setting out
the herbaceous plants—Tender bulbs that must be
stored for the winter—Division of roots.
CHAPTER XXIX
- 257
- 266
. 283
. 293
Inpoor Work 304
Propagation of plants by the amateur—Experiments
with pollen—Trying for a new variety of carna-
tion—Raising rhubarb in the cellar throughout the
winter—Making a mushroom bed.
CHAPTER XXX
- 823
Su@GESTIONS FOR THE GARDEN CALENDAR
XIV
EVERYMAN’S GARDEN
IN WARTIME
CHAPTER I
&
COLD WEATHER PLANNING AND
READING
Too often the calendar for the planting of seed
starts with April— March at the earliest — and
closes with September, as if the world of the gar-
dener began with a spring radish and ended with a
winter turnip. This may be because the calendar-
maker, who probably never plants anything, loses
sight of the fact that to the true philosopher of
the hoe there is no winter. What is called so, merely
as a convenience in dividing time, begins, according
to the almanac, on December twenty-first. But it
really ends there, too, for at that very time the
days begin to lengthen and there is nothing like
knowing that today has a fraction of a minute more
sunlight than yesterday to revive enthusiasm for
planting and to stir into life the winter vision of the
garden to be.
COLD WEATHER PLANNING
That vision-garden is of real fruitfulness. The
better and bigger its crop of plans and hopes the
more fresh vegetables there will be on the dreamer’s
table six months later. You raise the dreams in
rows or broadcast, according to fancy, on the snow-
covered, frost-filled patch that looks so barren to
those outside the cult.
So the calendar should say “ plant now,” mean-
ing the first of February or, any other time after
the winter solstice on December twenty-first — in
northern latitudes it might be well to wait till just
after Christmas -——and then should follow the cul-
tural directions for the beginner.
An ideal location for the vision-garden is in front
of an open fire in an out-of-town house, although |
suburban stove or radiator will do almost as well,
and some wonderful crops have been grown in city
flats and even in hall bedrooms equipped with oil
heaters ready to form a protecting smudge, such
as they use in orchards, to save the dreams from
winter-killing when the janitor shuts off the heat.
Having selected the site, build a small air-castle in
one corner, shielded from northeast winds, for the
storage of bulbs, watering pot, gardening tools and.
2
COLD WEATHER PLANNING
seed catalogues. If the gardener is short of build-
ing materials for such a structure he may use the
seed catalogues themselves. They make wonderful
air-castles of regular skyscraper dimensions. May
the poets who write these catalogues and the artists
who illustrate them never grow less fanciful and col-
orful! They show the tomato that everybody as-
pires to raise and therefore give the benefit of an
aspiration. They fill the picture pods with picture
peas that Nature never knew. They produce straw-
berries bigger and redder than those your grand-
father remembers as growing in his grandfather’s
garden when he was a boy.
So these catalogues serve a useful purpose by fur-
nishing an ideal. It is easy to prove. Let one gar-
dener struggle to raise a potato that will conform
to the dimensions and shapeliness of the pictured
vegetable, that will rival the mealiness of the de-
scription. Now let his neighbour be contented to
take as his model such a potato as he can buy
at the grocery store. Which will get the better
crop?
Pencil and paper are indispensable tools for this
February job of sowing dreams, because the garden
3
COLD WEATHER PLANNING
grows so fast that unless you keep strict account one
thing will overrun another and neither will do so
well. Begin by drawing the outer boundaries, mak-
ing the plan oblong if you have the room; if not,
square. It is better to have a circle or a triangle
or any other shape known to the geometry-makers _
than not to have a garden at all. The long garden .
is simply the ideal sort because of the economy of
time and strength in caring for it. It is easier to
do the hoeing up and down long rows, especially if
you use one of those handy little wheel hoes.
For the same reason put plants of similar size and
shape and those which require similar treatinent in
the same part of the garden. If you do not want
to plant enough peas, for instance, to fill out one
or more complete rows finish out the vacant place
with bush beans, so that the two kinds of vegetables
which are to be cultivated in the same way may
receive attention at the same hoeing without un-
necessary effort. That is a point one is apt to for-
get while working in the vision-garden across which
you can stride without getting up from the arm-
chair. But minutes do count when the real fun
and business begin, especially if you are commuting
4
COLD WEATHER PLANNING
and that 5:19 train is apt to be late and cheat you
out of your weeding hour, or if your wife insists
on your going to church Sunday morning.
In running things together on your preliminary
sheet of plans do not forget to leave space for the
subsequent plantings of the same thing. A garden
is only half a garden that does not provide for suc-
cessive crops and a continuous feast all through the
growing season.
Eggplants and peppers naturally go together in
a separate group not far from the tomatoes — three
things which will not come on the stage until the
rest of the garden is well under way. Beets, tur-
nips, carrots and parsnips belong in the same sec-
tion; the cabbage and cauliflower in another. Give
the potatoes as much room as you can spare. Noth-
ing gives the amateur such a boastful, professional-
like feeling as to raise his own potatoes. Not that
it is difficult, but they seem so much more like real
staple food supply, so much more businesslike than
radishes, for example. Of course the suburban gar-
dener who actually raises enough potatoes to carry
him through the winter becomes a political economist
and is qualified to deliver lectures at the church men’s
5
‘COLD WEATHER PLANNING
club on the high cost of living problem and how to
prevent famines in China.
Onions, for which you will put out, sets without
bothering with seed, deserve good room. If you do
not love them now get the appetite. They are bet-
ter for next winter’s colds in the family heads than
many grains of quinine.
The corn, as even the amateur having his very
first garden dream must know, grows high and so
makes shade. It must be placed where its waving
stalks will not cheat the other inhabitants of their
fair share of light and air. The same thing is true
of the pole-twining limas.
As the proof of the garden is in the eating of the
meals that come out of it there must be salad ma-
terial in abundance. So make generous allowance
for the lettuce bed — one that will last all summer
by planting new ground and replanting on the
old. ‘Then draw a series of circles and mark them
for the cucumber hills. To provide the dinner des-
sert or the breakfast appetizer give the melon patch
all the space you can on your mid-winter paper plan.
Then add a few more square feet to that and, finally,
leave a marginal strip for a strawberry bed.
6
i
COLD WEATHER PLANNING
The amateur gardener reading his latest book on
horticulture, and his classically ambitious daughter
at the other side of the library table doing her after-
dinner school work in Latin, may be reading prac-
tically the same thing without either realising it.
Somewhere in his guide book, printed for the com-
ing season, the gardener will be warned not to try
to work his ground before the March winds have
dried out the mud left by the departing frost. He
will read that wood ashes are excellent for the soil,
that he must be generous with the manure pile, that
he must put each thing in the place best adapted to
it, that after harrowing or raking his ploughed or
spaded ground it will help the soil a lot to smooth
and pulverize the surface still further by dragging
brush over it.
On her side of the droplight the schoolgirl, with
an occasional sigh and frequent fluttering references
to the vocabulary in the back of the book, will man-
age to dig the following translation out of her Virgil,
written two thousand years before her father ever
thought of having a garden:
“In early spring, as soon as the dissolving snow
melts on the white mountains and the earth crum-
T
COLD WEATHER PLANNING
bles, unbound by the wind, even then let my plough
be pressed down. But before our iron cuts an un-
broken plain, first let us learn with care the winds
and changing habits of the sky, the natural culture
and disposition of the ground and what each plot
will produce or refuse to bear. Here corn grows
happiest, there the vines; there flourish fruit trees
best and herbs unbidden spring.
‘Be not ashamed to soak the arid soil with rich
dung or freely to cast the smutty ashes on the ex-
hausted fields. Very greatly does he help the fields
who with harrows breaks the sluggish sods and drags
over them the osier hurdles.”
And so on, through all the practical garden book
of the present and the pastoral of 40 B.C., or
thereabouts, will be found corresponding hints to
the gardener, the chief difference being that the first
is in prose and the other in blank verse.
Virgil himself was, comparatively, a modern gar-
den writer. They used to accuse him of stealing
a lot of his agricultural lore from Hesiod, who had
advised the Greeks how to manage their crops seven
centuries or so before Virgil saw his first dandelion,
or whatever the early spring flower happened to be
8
COLD WEATHER PLANNING
in his part of the world. But when Hesiod gave his
advice the world already had been following it for
ages.
That is one of the fascinating things revealed by
- books about having a garden—the continuity of
the thing. You are doing what the ancients did
in practically the same way, for the same purpose
and getting the same results. Of what other form
of human activity can this be said?
Of course we have more tools, some of them made
for the profit of the dealer rather than for the benefit
of the garden, and we have more books, covering a
thousand more details — see the United States Agri-
cultural Department’s list of free literature — but
on the fundamental principles there is little new.
The most modern government writer in Washington
is giving the gardeners of the country the same good
advice on the main points that Virgil gave the Ro-
mans and Hesiod the Greeks.
However, after a little winter reading of the clas-
sics, just for fun and to give an added touch of
sentiment and tradition to the work with the hoe —
to exalt the manure pile, so to speak — it is better
to switch to the modern books to save time and to ©
9
COLD WEATHER PLANNING
get specific instructions in details. It is remarkable
how numerous and how good those books are — there
are enough of them, almost, for every gardener to
have his own pet volume, and not the same as his
neighbour’s. ‘There are probably more pamphlets
on radish culture, for example, than on the care
of babies. Begin this book-learning part of your
garden work by writing to the agricultural experi-
ment station of your own state and to the Agri
cultural Department at Washington for their lists
of free publications. This suggestion is as much
for the man with a ten-foot garden of flowers or
vegetables as for ‘the farmer with many acres, for
no patch of ground is too small for the Government
to recognise as worthy of cultivation and no problem
too simple for its aid.
Provided with the lists, which include subjects all
the way from pig management to violets, the ama-
teur gardener can select the pamphlets that cover
his particular needs and be sure of finding in them
all the help he wants.
If your neighbour in the country happens to be
a professional gardener or a farmer who takes no
stock in scientific methods — there are a few such
10
COLD WEATHER PLANNING
left — be friendly and tell him about your advice
from Washington, for it will amuse him. And you
may be sure he will watch your garden as closely
as he does his own, for, no matter how much he scoffs,
he cannot help being curious. Produce a good crop
of this or that, and he will come round sheepishly
and ask if you mind lending him that book.
Then you will have the satisfaction of being in
the rapidly growing army of agricultural mission-
aries, recruited each spring from the thousands of
“city greenhorns ” who move to the land but who
must, because of their ignorance, preface actual ex-
perience with reading what experts have written,
and who thus learn a thing or two to show the men
who have tilled the ground all their lives.
11
CHART hh it
®
StA VUNG) 2 A EA MLE Ys Poo EB Se
Tue figures that follow are only approximate.
Every gardener or grocery-store patron probably
could add something to or subtract something from
them, but they are near enough to a fair average to
demonstrate that Everyman’s garden may materially
lessen the family’s cost of living.
One quart of seed corn is enough to plant one hun-
dred hills. It costs about thirty-five cents. The
one hundred hills, under normal conditions and with
reasonable care, should produce six hundred ears —
that is, fifty dozen. For good early corn at the
store the householder pays about twenty-two cents
a dozen—for the fifty dozen eleven dollars, as
against thirty-five cents for raising the same amount
in Everyman’s garden. Does such a garden pay?
It would seem so.
Take potatoes. A peck of seed, enough for four
12
SAVING TRE PAMIiY PUnRS &
rows, each twenty-five feet long, costs from seventy-
five cents to a dollar according to variety; eighty-
five cents is a good average. This seed ought to
yield six pecks, or a bushel and a half. New pota-
toes sell at the best stores when they first come into
market as high as a dollar and a half a bushel. The
bushel and a half which Everyman might grow from
his eighty-five cents’ worth of seed would cost him
two dollars and a quarter at his grocer’s. The po-
tato corroborates the corn as to the benefit to the
household account to be derived from intelligent use
of the soil back of the house.
Why pay eight cents apiece for the first cucum-
bers and five cents later on? A small packet of seed,
costing not more than ten cents, will plant twenty
hills, which will yield at least six dollars’? worth of
cucumbers, at store valuation.
Thirty-five cents will buy a quart of seed for four
twenty-five-foot rows of bush beans, enough to sup-
ply the average family for three weeks. Beans sell
at the store at ten cents a quart. One good mess
from the grocer costs more than the seed for all four
bean rows in the garden.
The earliest peas, those that every man with a
13
SAVING THE FAMILY PURSE
normal appetite and healthy enjoyment of food ex-
pects to have on his table not later than the middle
of June, or by July Fourth in New England, cost
seventy-five cents a peck. For twenty cents he can
get a pint of seed that will give him a fifty-foot strip
of peas in his own garden. And nobody who has
eaten peas from his own garden ever wants any more
from the store. He may eat beans or potatoes or
carrots from the store or the huckster’s wagon; to
save himself from starvation he might nibble a little
of the grocer’s flavourless, three-day-old corn; but
for the grocer’s peas his own vines have spoiled him
for all time.
The price of melons or cantaloupes runs all the
way from two for a quarter to six for a quarter,
according to season. But for twenty cents Every-
man can buy enough seed for twenty-five hills of.
melons, which should enable every member of his fam-
ily to have a whole one for breakfast every morning
during the season.
This story of the garden, as told in dollars and
cents, holds true for every vegetable on the list.
And the cost of fertilizer, whether from the chemical
factory or the barnyard, amounts to so little for the
14
SAVING THE FAMILY PURSE
small garden that it hardly detracts from the bal-
ance on the right side of the table expense account.
It is much more than offset by increased nutriment
values, by better health and digestion, and by greater
satisfaction of all the members of the family — all
of which come from eating absolutely fresh vegetables
rather than the wilted sort from the store or cart.
After allowing two dollars for one day of hired
help on the preliminary spading, or five dollars for
the services of a man and team with plough and har-
row, there is no labour cost to Everyman’s Garden
because there should be no labour, in the burden-
some sense of the word; nothing but pleasure and the
most wholesome sort of exercise. Instead of charg-
ing anything for his own time and effort, the gar-
dener might go so far the other way as to put his
work down as profit — a saving of doctor’s bills and
athletic club dues.
Of course the saving on the cost of living by
means of a garden is not confined to the actual grow-
ing season. There are canning and preserving pos-
sibilities to be taken into consideration. From the
summer surplus of the garden a large part — by far
the most palatable and healthy part — of the food
15
SAVING THE FAMILY PURSE
supply for the coming winter can be obtained in the
shape of canned peas and beans, corn and tomatoes,
pickled cucumbers, and various other things that
every housewife knows about. The canned products
of home raising and preserving are fully as preferable
to the store supplies in tin as are the fresh veg-
etables superior to the stock of the huckster’s cart,
and the margin of nutriment and safety to health
is much greater. .
Then, too, there are the regular winter vegetables
— potatoes, carrots, turnips, onions, parsnips, cel-
ery and all the rest that are to be stored. Nothing
makes Everyman in his garden feel quite so impor-
tant, so much a man of substance in the community,
as to produce, for the first time, his winter supply
of these vegetables.
To get all that food and satisfaction it is worth
while to take pains and do the thing in the best way,
So here are some suggestions for that household
staple, the potato. In the first place do not plant
potatoes where they were last year. As a matter
of fact the longer interval between two plantings
on the same piece of ground, the better, for potatoes
are subject to several diseases, notably scab, the
16
SAVING THE FAMILY PURSE
germs of which remain alive in the soil from one sea-
son to the next and attack the following ‘crop.
These scab germs may be on the seed potatoes them-
selves, so it is well, before cutting, to soak them for
two hours in a solution of a gill — four ounces — of
formaldehyde in seven quarts of water or to put
them in an air-tight outbuilding or a room in the
cellar and burn there a formaldehyde candle, which
may be bought for a quarter or less at the drug store.
The next question is cutting. Commercial grow-
ers, as a rule, leave two eyes on each seed piece to
be put in the ground. For the amateur a sensible
thing is to cut each in halves.
As potatoes grow all the way from coast to coast
and from Alaska to Mexico no amateur gardener in
the United States need fear to try a crop. How-
ever the ideal soil is a sandy loam and it must be
well drained, for too much moisture will rot the
seed. If there is no such soil available its advan-
tages may be obtained, in part at least, by drain-
age and by the ploughing under of a lot of barnyard
manure, not only to enrich the soil but to loosen it.
Deep tillage is necessary in preparation of the
ground, and after the ground has been thoroughly
17
SAVING THE FAMILY PURSE
ploughed the seed pieces should be covered by four
inches of earth. The potato cannot thrive if it is
skimped in its supply of nitrogen, phosphoric acid
and potash. Barnyard manure will supply these
in sufficient quantity and right proportions, but if
the soil is naturally of the right texture or has been
heavily manured for a season or two before, it is bet-
ter to use a chemical fertilizer. No fertilizer of any
sort should come in direct contact with the seed.
If ground space is ample plant in hills two feet
apart each way — two feet and a half is better for
cultivation. Drop three seed pieces in each hill. If
space is limited plant in rows, or drills, two feet
apart and drop two seed pieces every foot in each
row.
al
18
CHAPTER III
®
GARDEN SOILS, GOOD AND BAD
Loam is a mixture of sand or clay with many years’
accumulation of decomposed vegetable matter, such
as leaves, plant stems, rotted sod and weeds, and
decayed fragments of wood. The base of this blend
may be clay or sand or both, but it is not loam unless
the rotted vegetable substance, technically known as
organic matter or humus, is there in sufficient quan-
tity and transforms it into a life-giving blend for
more plants, which in their turn will die and add
their stems and leaves, thereby increasing the loami-
ness.
No apology is offered for this definition of the
very stuff of which the garden is made. To some it
may seem as obvious and as unnecessary as to define
water as a liquid, but, to nine amateur gardeners
out of ten, soil terms, used so glibly by the experts,
are a puzzle. Loam is one of them. Beginners
19
GARDEN SOILS
read of sour soil and sweet soil, light soil and heavy
soil, loam, sandy loam and clayey loam, and won-
der what it all means. Fortunately they can go
ahead and have very good gardens without solving
the puzzle, but knowing why, in the long run, may
become as useful as knowing how. At any rate, it
adds one hundred per cent to the pleasure, if not
quite as much as that to the profit, of having the
garden.
In this respect you may look at your garden in
several different figurative ways in addition to con-
sidering it as so many square feet of dirt out of which
you can take flowers and vegetables every year for
some reason or other that you know nothing about.
In one sense it is a bank where you have principal
on deposit in the shape of soil substance and fertil-
ity. The vegetable crop is the annual interest and
that may be decreased from year to year to the van-
ishing point or greatly increased in quantity and
quality according to whether you impair the princi-
pal or add to it.
Again, the garden is a chemical laboratory in
which many wizard-like performances are always go-
ing on to produce the desired plant life. With the
20
GARDEN SOILS
laboratory, as with the bank, the gardener must co-
operate. He must know what chemicals are lack-
ing and how and when, in what quantities and in
what shape to supply them. We hear a great deal
about scientific farming, comparatively little about
scientific gardening. But a very little science will
do as much in proportion for a back lot, otherwise
hopeless for a garden, as it will for one of the much-
talked-of abandoned farms.
So to begin with the soil — the ideal sort for the
garden is the light and sweet sandy loam. The prim-
itive way, assuming now the case of the man who
has just moved from city to suburbs, is to plant the
garden on the spot available, without knowing any-
thing of its fertility or texture, past uses or abuses,
and trust to luck and the hoe.
But in spite of constant and faithful work with
that hoe and all the other garden tools, the vegetable
interest returns on the principal invested in work
and seed and manure may be scant as to quality and
quantity. If the labour has not been skimped it may
be taken for granted there is something wrong with
the soil. If that fact is ascertained at the begin-
ning of the season instead of at the end, as it may
21
GARDEN SOILS
be, the defect can be remedied in advance and the
very first season’s attempt of the amateur made a
success instead of a failure.
Too much acidity is one of the chief causes of fail-
ure on ground long neglected or misused — in other
words sour soil. Whether the patch selected for
the garden is sour or sweet may be learned absolutely
by anybody not colour-blind at the cost of five cents
in money and five minutes in time. The trick can
be done winter or summer.
Invest a nickel at any drug store in half a dozen
strips of blue litmus paper. Place one of them in
a handful of soil where it is damp. If it turns red
there is too much acid there; the soil is sour. Try
the same experiment in various other parts of the
garden with the other strips of paper, so as to get
a line on the whole patch. If it shows enough acid —
to turn the paper the trouble can be remedied at
small expense by sprinkling on lime, say, a pound
for every twenty square feet, and raking it in. That
is a liberal allowance; the same amount is put on to
prepare land in the East for alfalfa, and no other
crop is so absolutely dependent on sweetness of soil
as alfalfa.
22
GARDEN SOILS
To demonstrate to yourself what this lime will do
for the whole garden dip one of the strips of litmus
paper into water with lime in it and the telltale red
spot showing sourness will turn blue again. If it is
desired to make this soil test in the winter, to save
time or satisfy any curiosity that may have been
aroused by this hint, bring a lump of the frozen soil
into the kitchen and make mud of it with some warm
water.
The next question—JIs the soil loamy enough?
If it has been heavily fertilized for several years with
barnyard manure it probably is, for the manure is
full of straw and that makes humus. If the garden
is a new one, made on land recently a lawn, the
ploughed-under, rotting sod has furnished the humus.
The same is true of land that has received a deposit, ©
year after year, of dead weeds and leaves. Perhaps
it is an old garden which has been manured in pre-
vious seasons and has taken back to itself the stems
and foliage of many plants after the harvests.
In any of these cases it is better to use chemical
fertilizers. They do not bring weed seeds into the
garden, as will almost any manure from barnyards
in the country where horses have a chance to supple-
23
GARDEN SOILS
ment their grain rations in the barn with grazing
in the pasture. Furthermore the commercial fer-
tilizers contain, in the most quickly available form,
the essential plant foods that the land is most likely
to lack. They are easier to have delivered and to
handle. A man may lug home by hand almost as
much real plant food in a bundle as he would get in
a load of manure.
There are special manufactured mixtures for dif-
ferent plants, but a very excellent brand for general
garden purposes, particularly effective for fruit, is
in this proportion: ten pounds of phosphate, five
pounds of muriate of potash, and four of pure ground
bone. That total of nineteen pounds, doubled, would
be good for one year’s fertilizing of a garden con-
taining 1500 square feet, and ought not to cost more
than three cents a pound. It should be broadcasted
after the ploughing or spading has been done and then
thoroughly raked or harrowed in.
Nitrate is not mentioned in this formula partly
because the use of that chemical, which furnishes the
very essential nitrogen, is a risky thing for the ama-
teur. It is apt to give him a too luxuriant growth
of leaf and stem of a beautiful, rich green, and too
24
GARDEN SOILS
little fruit or vegetable. Nitrate also is much more
expensive than potash and phosphate and there are
two better ways of getting nitrogen into the soil
than by using the commercial chemical.
One is to scatter hen manure on the land through
the winter and let it soak in with the spring rain.
Make sure it has worked well into the soil before
planting, because seed in actual contact with this
strong manure will die. Be liberal with the hen
manure in the place where the beets are going to be
planted, for they thrive best on lots of nitrogen just
as all fruits, small or tree, thrive on potash.
The other natural, inexpensive way to get nitro-
gen is to plant clover, preferably crimson clover, in
such part of the garden as you have taken the har-
vest from late in August. It will start its growth
_ in the late summer, develop some in early fall, live
through the winter and renew growth early in the
spring. ‘Then it should be ploughed under. It will
carry with it quantities of nitrogen which it has ab-
sorbed from the air, besides making a valuable addi-
tion to the humus of the soil. Dig it under before
it blossoms, otherwise its continued growth will rob
the vegetable plants of too much moisture. Peas
25
GARDEN SOILS
and beans have this same power to take nitrogen
from the air and deposit it in the soil.
If the stems of plants are short and thin and
wabbly, if the foliage is scant and turns yellow be-
fore it should, that is a sure sign more nitrogen is
needed.
If the plant itself thrives, but fails to produce its
fruit, that is a sure sign the soil needs potash and
phosphate.
Fortunately for both farmers and gardeners
nearly every state in the Union, through its agri-
cultural experiment station, now undertakes to pro-
tect the public against worthless fertilizers by analyz-
ing samples of all the commercial mixtures put on
the market by seedsmen and the manufacturers. Re-
ports of these examinations are published, giving
names of the makers, the trade names of their prod-
ucts, and an exact statement of what each contains.
These reports may be had for the asking.
This same experiment station of your state will
examine a sample of your soil and, if possible, tell
you what it needs. It is not so simple for the ama-
teur who knows nothing of chemistry to tell about
the potash, and so on, as it is for him to test for
26
GARDEN SOILS
acidity. He must apply to the state’s experts or
wait for evidence furnished by the plants.
For gardens not rich in humus barnyard manure
is the thing. Such gardens lack loam and their too
sandy appearance will indicate that fact even to the
amateur; or perhaps they have been treated too long
without addition of humus.
Simply adding more chemicals to these soils will
not solve the problem, because their texture is such
that food is not made available for the plants even
if it is in the ground in abundance. The ploughing
under of the manure will break this ground up, make
it loose — or friable, as the experts say —so it
warms up more quickly in the spring and stays warm.
Most important of all, it enables the soil to retain
moisture because the more separate particles there
are the more water there will be available to the
plants.
ay
CHAPTER: TY
&
TOOLS THAT ARBRE ESSENTIAL
As displayed in the store window, leaning up against
the big prize pumpkin, or as pictured in the garden-
tool catalogue, a hoe is only a hoe; but in actual
operation it is a good hoe or a poor one, according
to its suitability for the particular gardener who is
using it and quite independent of the quality of its
make or materials. This is equally true of the rake,
the spade and all the other implements needed for
working in the soil.
So, then, let the gardener choose his hoe with as ~
much care as a man would select his golf sticks or his
baseball bat, billiard cue or tennis racquet. Don’t
order it by mail. Don’t, after a long session with
the dealer on the matter of seed, hurry away with-
out a visit to the implement department, leaving it
to the storekeeper to pick out any hoe he may have
to add to your order.
28
TOOLS ESSENTIAL
Examine the tools yourself. Heft the hoe, balance
it, try it on an imaginary row of vegetables, con-
sider the length and the weight of it, the diameter
of the handle, the width of the blade. And if it
doesn’t fit you, if it doesn’t hang just right, if the
feel of it doesn’t make you want to get night to
work in the garden, it is not the hoe you ought to
have. Try another and as many more as necessary
till you find the hoe that was made for you.
This matter of selecting the tools is of real im-
portance. It makes a big difference later on in the
ease and pleasure with which the work is done. It
means the difference between getting a backache or
the best and most healthful development of the mus-
cles of the back. If the hoe is right at the outset
it becomes an object of genuine regard. The true
gardener is an artist, and the tools of his art be-
come something more to him than the mere imple-
ments of wood and metal.
For a good hoe in its second or third season, after
the uncomfortable newness has been worn off the
handle, after the blade has had its too square corners
rounded a bit and its surface scoured bright by much
contact with the soil, the gardener will have the same
29
TOOLS ESSENTIAL
fondness that a smoker has for his favourite briar -
after it is seasoned. That feeling is out of the ques-
tion if the thing is awkward and unwieldy at the
start. Therefore put down the matter of buying
the tools, all of them, as something that requires
thought and real discrimination.
Don’t buy too many. There are novelties put on
the market every year that just cumber the garden
patch, add much to the expense and nothing to the
ease or thoroughness of cultivation. A spading
fork, a rake and a hoe are the three prime essentials.
A castaway on a desert island with those three things
only could run a very creditable garden; but the list
may be lengthened to great advantage to include a
spring tooth weeder, a spade, a wheelbarrow, a reel
and line, a trowel, a dibber, a hand pump for in-
secticide spraying and a_ bellows for dusting
plants.
In every such list, whether long or short, there
should be mentioned, very near the top, the gar-
dener’s ten fingers. For the perfect, weedless gar-
den the human hand is an indispensable tool. No
manufactured implement can take its place. After
the most thorough hoeing and raking and the closest
30
TOOLS ESSENTIAL
possible work with the weeder, there are those hid-
den spears of grass and first leaflets of the oncoming
weed close against the stem of the flower or vegetable
plant, ready to choke it and cheat it of its full share
of soil nourishment, if left till next hoeing time.
It is in getting rid of these little things that the best
gardening is done, and must be done, with the fingers.
Furthermore there is nothing so effective as the hand
in pulverizing the soil about any particular pet plant
which the grower wants to bring to perfection just
as an example of what can be done.
In the minimum list of essentials the spading fork
is mentioned rather than the spade, because nobody
but the amateur with nobody to advise him ever
spades with a spade except when the job must be
combined with the work of cutting off the tag ends
of a lot of old roots or slicing through sod.
The spading fork, with its four broad tines, is
better for many reasons. It goes into the ground
much more easily, so more ground can be turned with
it for the same amount of energy and muscle power
than with a spade. This saving of strength is of
real importance to the man whose gardening must
be done in the odd hours and who is not used to dig-
31
TOOLS ESSENTIAL
ging. The tines of the fork, instead of compacting
the soil and causing it to cake, as the solid spade
does, serve to loosen and pulverize it with every fork-
ful that is turned over.
For the symmetry of a garden the reel and line
are needed. Trying to hoe a straight drill for seeds
by guesswork and the eye is unsatisfactory work.
It can’t be done. And a garden of crooked rows is
not only a thing that you don’t care to have your
friends see but something that cannot be cultivated
with economy of time and effort. So get the reel
and line and stake and have a true, geometrical guide
for every row and every section of the garden. Of
course an ordinary string will do, but not so well.
It will snarl and, being of no account, will be left
round to clutter the place or else lost before it is
time to use it again. The reel should have a long
metal handle that can be thrust into the ground and
held firm while the line is unwound and carried to the —
other end of the row.
No garden patch is too small to have a wheelbar-
row. It saves thousands of steps in the course of
a season, from the time it is used for carting manure
about in the spring to the harvest season when the
32
TOOLS ESSENTIAL
crop is taken to the kitchen door. It is handy in
the work of transplanting. It is good for the re-
moval of rubbish. It will hold the watering pot or
the hose reel and all the tools, thus reducing the
evening job of putting things away to one trip from
garden to shed.
There are all sorts of hoes. If you are to have
only one, by all means get the pointed, heart-shaped
one. It will do the ordinary work of surface till-
age and cutting the weeds almost as quickly as the
square hoe; besides that, it will make a drill or fur-
row for seeds of just the right depth and angle of
opening by simply drawing it down the line of plant-
ing. Also, its pointed blade enables you to work
much closer to the roots of the plants without bruis-
ing the leaves and stems. And, still another argu-
ment, it is lighter and handier to use and cuts into
the soil much more easily, especially if the earth is
hard or stony.
The push hoe, or scuffle hoe as the English gar-
deners call it, is also a useful but not indispensable
thing to have round the garden. It looks something
like an old-fashioned hand mincemeat chopper on a
long handle and is pushed along on the surface or
33
TOOLS ESSENTIAL
just under it to cut off small weeds between the rows.
It is of no use for heavy weeding or on ground not
well cultivated. .
Its chief advantage is that in the work of weeding
the occasional use of the scuffle hoe is rather restful
because pushing, substituted for pulling, brings into
play a different set of muscles, That may seem a
very trivial reason to a man sitting in a comfort-
able chair several weeks before outdoor work can be-
gin; but the cumulative saving of strength in a
thousand little ways means a great deal. It helps
conserve the gardener’s enthusiasm of the early spring
all through the summer and to make it proof against
the discouragements of poor crops and drought and
pests.
The rake is as useful as the hoe or the fork, but
it serves a different purpose. It is to the garden
what the harrow is to the field and should follow the
fork to smooth the surface and pulverize the soil.
It should be used for the same reason after each
hoeing. In fact it cannot be used too often, because
the finer the soil the more moisture it retains beneath
the surface where the roots can get it in a dry time.
And nothing adds more to the good appearance of
34
TOOLS ESSENTIAL
a garden than a level, well raked, finely lined, weed-
less, grassless surface.
For the very necessary pulverizing an old board
or a bunch of dead tree branches or brush might well
be added to the list of tools. Weight the board
with a stone and drag it over the surface immediately
after spading to break up all the clumps and clods.
Follow that up with the brush to make the earth
still finer; then use the rake.
As already said of the hoe, the rake must be se-
lected with reference to its weight and balance and
length of handle to suit the man or woman who
is to use it. But it is well to get a wide one, at
least as wide as the distance apart between the rows
of the most closely planted vegetables. That means
that one trip down the line covers the whole inter-
vening space.
The weeder should have a short handle, one with
which you get right down on your knees to put the
finishing touches on the cultivation. There are many
shapes and sizes of these hand weeders, but any one
with three or four spring prongs will do the work.
After you have used for one season the one you hap-
pen to select, you will talk and boast about it as
TOOLS ESSENTIAL
the best thing of the sort ever invented. In that
respect weeders are like automobiles or typewriters
or babies.
For transplanting, particularly in the flower gar-
den and for work with bulbs, the trowel and dibber
are on the list of things one surely should have. Of
course everybody knows what a trowel is and what to
do with it. The dibber or dibble— either word is
right —is simply a sharp-pointed, round tool of
wood or metal, used for making the right size and
shape of hole in the ground in which to drop a bulb
or place the root of a plant that is being trans-
planted. Such a hole can be made with the trowel
but not so well or so quickly.
As the fighting of insects and fungous pests
must be done in every garden that is to amount to
anything, the need of the spray pump and the dust-
bellows is self-evident. ‘There is no other method
of getting the various insecticides and fungicides on
the plants evenly and effectively, and unless the
spraying or dusting is done so thoroughly that every
part is covered, it is merely a waste of time and ma-
terial wasted. A small fraction of a square inch
left unsprayed will afford ample breeding space for
36
f
TOOLS ESSENTIAL
enough of the particular thing you are fighting to
ruin the plant you think you are saving.
No doubt there are other tools occasionally worth
having for special conditions, but for Everyman’s
Garden the list here given is sufficient. If, after
they and the seeds have been purchased, there is any-
thing’ left of the family appropriation for the gar-
den it may much better be spent on an extra bag
of commercial fertilizer or an addition to the ma-
nure pile than on tool frills.
37
CHAPTER V.
®
GARDEN EUGENICS
PREVENTION is as much more than cure in the gar-
den as anywhere else. For nearly all the pests and
diseases that torment plants there are now cures or
approved methods of control, but nothing is quite
so satisfactory as giving the garden the best possible
start, thereby assuring such strength and health of
plant growth that the weeds will have little chance,
and the need of poisonous sprays and powders for
the bugs and fungi will be reduced to a minimum.
There is no question that weeds will outgrow plants
on a neglected plat, but by a friendly dispensation
of Nature the reverse is true where the tillage is
good.
In the beginning there must be what might be
called the eugenics of the garden — the seeing to it
that flower and vegetable plants are well born from
good seed in a perfect seedbed. With reasonable care
38
GARDEN EUGENICS
thereafter the probabilities of a full harvest are ex-
cellent. )
Watch the patch selected for the garden through
the season of spring rains. If the water stands in
pools that is all the evidence needed that there should
be provided some form of artificial drainage. The
suggestion of drainage frightens the average ama-
teur because he knows nothing about it. In a vague
sort of way he thinks of it as something that requires
the skill of a civil engineer and the expenditure of
much money — at any rate as something entirely be-
yond him. As a matter of fact the thing is very
simple. In ordinary cases any man who knows
enough to spade his own garden can drain it, and it
need cost nothing but the work he puts into the job.
Dig a hole where the water collects in puddles.
Go down three or four feet, getting out some of the
hard clay soil that causes the water to stand on the
surface, fill in with loose stones or old brush and then
restore the surface of the garden by putting back the
top soil. That is a drain in its simplest form. It
is the same as punching a hole in the bottom of a
tin dish. The water simply runs out.
If there are many wet spots in the garden it is
39
GARDEN EUGENICS
better to dig a series of ditches, eight or ten feet
apart and parallel to each other. Have them extend
beyond the line of the garden on its lowest side and
have their outer ends a trifle lower than where they
start so the water will find a natural flow away from
where it is not wanted. Fill in the ditches with a
foot or a foot and a half of loose stones or brush, or
put in porous tiles, and then throw back the top soil.
That will drain that garden.
Even these simple devices are not necessary on
sandy soil or where there is sufficient slope to take
the water off by gravity. A little experimental dig-
ging here and there to learn what the subsoil is like
and a close watch of the surface after rains will tell —
each gardener what his own needs are in this respect.
If he discovers that drainage is necessary he mustn’t
neglect the matter or take a chance on having a dry —
summer. A dry summer for a poorly drained gar-
den means soil that is baked and caked and cracked,
that will produce nothing worth picking. A wet
summer for that same patch means drowned seeds,
mud, and plants rotted before they can produce any-
thing. 7
With the underground work disposed of, the next
40
GARDEN EUGENICS
step is the making of the seedbed — the all-important
matter of tillage. Possibly there is a farmer near-
by or a truck gardener with an hour or two to spare
who will plough and harrow the patch. So much the
better. That will save the spading which is the only
real backache-producing work in the whole process
of gardening from one end of the season to the other.
It will also assure a deeper and more uniform turning
over of the soil.
If this outside labour is available have the neigh-
bour plough, then go over the ground with a disc har-
row at right angles to the furrows and finish off with
a spike or smoothing harrow. Don’t ask the truck
gardener to do more than that, for if you do he will
be impatient and think you are a garden lunatic.
But you can supplement his work to great advan-
tage and make the surface soil still smoother and
finer by dragging over it a bunch of brush and even-
ing it off and, as the final touch, by drawing a board
over it.
All this can be accomplished even if there is no
man with a plough in the neighbourhood. ‘The gar-
dener’s spade and rake and hoe are substituted for
the horse-drawn tools of the professional and should
Al
GARDEN EUGENICS
be followed in just the same way by the brush and
the board.
The chief purpose of this preliminary care and
thoroughness is to get the ideal texture of the soil.
The deeper the tillage, the more room for the expan-
sion of the root system which must support the plant
and give it strength to bear fruit later on. And the
finer the soil is pulverized, the more moisture it will
hold.
The beneficial moisture we are talking about now
is sometimes called film moisture. It forms a film-
like casing about each particle of the soil. Hence
the necessity of having many particles, which can be
obtained only by thorough fining. This water film
dissolves the several chemical plant foods there are
in the soil and gives the roots a chance to absorb
them into the plant system.
Texture of the ground improves year after year
with repeated cultivation if care is taken to renew
the humus or decayed vegetable matter in the soil by
spading under barnyard manure, which not only fer-
tilizes but prevents the earth from becoming too com-
pact. |
Next in the sequence after drainage and prelimi-
42
GARDEN EUGENICS*
nary tillage or preparation of the seedbed come the
planting of the seed and the cultivation and protec-
tion of the plants up to harvest time. There is not
a day, from one end of the season to the other, ex-
cept very wet ones, when a little raking and hoeing
is not beneficial. Don’t work the soil during or im-
mediately after a heavy rain, because it will dry in
lumps and hurt the garden. But the sooner a little
cultivation is given after a light shower the better,
for the stirring of the soil locks within it some of the
new moisture that would otherwise escape by evapora-
tion from the surface. In long-continued periods
of dryness there must be daily cultivation. This is
dry farming on a small scale. Dry farming, about
which so much has been written in America recently,
is simply the trick of making one drop of water last
as long as a bucketful, by constant cultivation.
Hoeing and raking are not primarily for the ex-
termination of weeds, but to conserve moisture. In
a well-kept garden the weeds are so few and so small
that the removal of them is merely incidental to the
cultivation for other purposes.
So much for prevention of garden troubles by a
right start and proper care thereafter; but sickness
43,
GARDEN EUGENICS
will creep into the most sanitary households and some
pests will come to the best-regulated gardens.
This matter of garden hygiene is a big subject —
so big, in fact, that if the amateurs should happen
to read a full list of plant diseases and insects before
he had his first enthusiasm aroused by his seed cata-
logue he might never try to have a garden. For-
tunately the enthusiasm comes first and Everyman
learns little by little that there are obstacles to be
overcome. <A real garden disaster that destroys all
a man’s work is as rare as a plague of cholera in a
civilized country. It is only here and there that a
crop fails entirely or does not come up to reasonable
expectations in quality or quantity, and by that
time Everyman has learned enough of gardening to
meet these troubles philosophically and intelligently.
At the outset he may read the discouraging fact -
that the entomologists and plant pathologists have
discovered and classified no less than three hundred
different things that interfere with the growth of
sweet corn, but he will go on year after year having
reasonable success with his corn and never know any
diseases in it but smut, and no enemy except the worm
that begins at the top of the ear by the silk and eats
4A
nr
GARDEN EUGENICS
‘
its way down through the kernels, leaving an un-
sightly spiral trail. Neither of these things is a
sufficient excuse for not planting corn next year.
They are just an incentive to find out what the mat-
ter is. So, in one way or another, through his corn
or his melons or his peas, the amateur learns that
there is more to gardening than digging, planting
and gathering the product. He wakes up to the fact
that the spray pump is as important a tool as the
rake. ‘Then he begins to be a real gardener. He
has his garden medicine cabinet and knows something
of symptoms and general principles of plant health.
One sanitary thing to do, for example, is to lime
the soil before planting. A pound of lime worked
into the surface soil of every twenty square feet of
garden is as clean and healthful a thing for plants
as a coat of lime on the inside of the poultry house
is for hens. Avoid diseases also by rotation of crops
—that is, by not planting the same thing in the
same place two seasons in succession. ‘This applies
particularly to potatoes and other root crops. ‘Try
not to bring trouble by using germ-laden manure or
disease-tainted seed.
Pests may be classified. There are the fungous
45
GARDEN EUGENICS
diseases, of which mildew is the most easily recog-
nised by the amateur, and the several kinds of insects
and worms which are also classified according to their
methods of attack. Some of them bore, but these
are in the orchard rather than the garden. Others
eat the stems and leaves and fruit, and still an-
other miserable crew just sucks out the life juices
of the plant. The selection of the cures must be
with reference to the weapons Nature has provided
the creatures for their work of destruction.
For those that eat and chew things up the best
remedy is Paris green, hellebore or arsenate of lead.
Paris green, for instance, is the most popular poison
with which to fight the potato bug, and the cutworm
that ruins so many tomato plants, especially in long-
continued dry spells. For the potatoes the poison
can be blown on the foliage with a pair of bellows,
but care must be taken that the under as well as the
upper surfaces of the leaves are sprinkled.
To use this poison for the tomato plants it is
best to mix it with cornmeal and scatter it on the
ground round the plants. The cutworm almost
never leaves the ground. He cuts off the stem at the
surface. Of course the cornmeal method is not de-
46
GARDEN EUGENICS
sirable if there are any chickens about. For the cut-
worm and potato bug hellebore and arsenate of lead
also may be used, as well as for all the pests of the
chewing tribe.
For the sucking variety of plant destroyers there
are the emulsions of kerosene, lime-sulphur sprays
and whale-oil soap. Lime sulphur seems to have the
weight of evidence in its favour now from the various
experiment stations as a cure for scale insects that
ruin fruit trees by attacking the bark. It may be
applied as a spray for the good of the bark and, with
a little arsenate of lead dissolved in it, makes a most
effective poison application for the worms that at-
tack fruit buds.
A gallon of water in which several plugs of to-
bacco have been steeped costs almost nothing as com-
pared with the commercial mixture and will prove an
excellent killer for insects on the stems and leaves
of plants.
Peas are afflicted with mildew and attacked by
weevils and the pea aphids or lice. For these
troubles spray with Bordeaux mixture or powder the
plants with sulphur. The weevil comes from bad
seed, so the dealer must be depended upon to save
AT
GARDEN EUGENICS
you from that unless you select especially fine pods
of your own growing for the seed supply for the next
year. To get rid of the lice, brush them from the
vines in the middle of a hot day.
To save the beans from both blight and pod spot,
spray thoroughly with Bordeaux mixture as soon as
the third leaf develops and every fortnight there-
after. A sprinkling of kerosene near the row will
make the ground unlivable for a maggot that at-
tacks beans.
Melons, squashes and cucumbers may be considered
as a single group with reference to both disease and
insect enemies. For the blight and mildew spray
with Bordeaux mixture as soon as the vines begin to
spread. The animal enemies are the melon worm,
the squash borer and the cucumber beetle. Although
named for the plants with which they are particu-
larly associated, each one of these pests will attack
all three vegetables — cucumber, melon and squash. —
Hellebore or arsenate of lead provides a good defence
against these things.
Rust is the principal disease that attacks aspara-
gus. It affects the tops and will kill the plants if,
allowed to go on unchecked. As it takes three years
48
GARDEN EUGENICS
to get an asparagus bed into bearing it is worth while
to control this disease and finally get rid of it. To
do so dust the tops with dry sulphur soon after cut-
ting the crop. Put it on early in the morning, when
the dew will hold the powder, and repeat this treat-
ment once a month.
Animal enemies of asparagus are the beetle and a
maggot called the miner. As suggested by its name
the miner gets under the skin of the plant near the
ground. Trap by leaving a few uncut plants on
which the miner-producing fly. will lay her eggs.
About the first of July these infested plants should
“be pulled out and burned.
The small asparagus beetle, less than a quarter of
an inch long and brilliantly coloured in red, yellow
and black, can be got rid of by dusting with air-
slaked lime.
Most of the diseases to which the potato is sub-
ject may be avoided by intelligent handling of the
seed before planting. In the first place select only
the soundest, healthiest looking potatoes to cut for
your seed. If possible know something about the soil
conditions under which the seed was grown. After
cutting sprinkle with sulphur— the old-fashioned
49
GARDEN EUGENICS
method. A newer precaution, and perhaps a more
effective one, as already suggested in the second
chapter, is to place the seed in an air-tight room
and there burn a formaldehyde candle as suggested
in the second chapter. ‘The same result is obtained
by soaking the seed for two hours in a solution of
half a pint of liquid formaldehyde to fifteen gallons
of water.
For leaf blight spray the plant with Bordeaux
mixture. By putting an ounce of Paris green in
every ten gallons of the Bordeaux mixture you get a
combined insecticide and fungicide which will kill
the familiar potato bug as well as control the leaf
blight. For a small potato patch pick the bugs off
by hand.
Blight and rust are the diseases of celery. Con-
trol both by spraying with Bordeaux mixture.
Hand-picking is the best way of getting rid of the cel-
ery caterpillar and this work may be supplemented by
spraying with hellebore, in either powder or liquid
form.
Lettuce diseases are best controlled by pulling out
the affected plants; at least pull off the bad leaves
and remove them from the garden and destroy.
50
GARDEN EUGENICS
Trouble may be avoided by care in watering. Do
not sprinkle the leaves themselves, as this is apt to
cause mildew. For the lettuce louse sprinkle to-
bacco dust on the soil as close to the plants as pos-
las: Persian powder, which is non-poisonous, may
be used to get rid of the lettuce worm.
Consider cabbage and cauliflower together. Lim-
ing the soil and crop rotation are the specific pre-
cautions against club root, which causes the roots
to swell and prevents the plants from heading.
Black rot is also warded off by not planting where
cabbage and cauliflower have been before. Another
precaution is to soak the seed for a few minutes in a
pint of water in which a tablet of mercuric chloride
has been dissolved.
Various maggots, worms and beetles attack the
cabbage. When the plants are young spray with
arsenate of lead. Dissolve two ounces of the poison
in five gallons of water. Later on dust with Per-
slam powder.
Bordeaux mixture is the spray for the mildew that
attacks the onion. A precaution against smut is
to put a very light sprinkling of sulphur into the
drill when the seed is planted. Small yellow insects,
51
GARDEN EUGENICS
called thrips, sometimes attack onions. Tobacco
dust will kill them.
Smut, rust and ear rot are the three diseases most
prevalent in the sweet-corn patch. Use of hen ma-
nure instead of that from the barnyard helps some.
Chemical fertilizer is still better. Plant the corn as
early as possible and use ground that has not been
in corn before for two or three years. When the
silver-grey coloured lump appears on the stalk or
ear, filled with black smut, cut it off and burn it.
That is about as far as the experts have gone in ar-
riving at the control of corn diseases.
These suggestions also have a bearing on the in-
sect enemies of corn. The surest way of avoiding
the worm already referred to on the ear is early
planting. For the cutworm, which is a specially
serious pest in dry weather, use poison on the ground
near the plant. This refers of course only to the
time when the corn is just a tender sprout and is in’
danger of being cut off at the ground, just as to-
mato plants are destroyed. A paste made of wheat
bran and Paris green scattered on the ground will
be taken as bait by the worms and that will end them.
52
CHAPTER’ VI
@
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
In each of the many public schools of the country
that offer courses in practical gardening one of the
leading questions on the final examination papers
should be: ‘* What would you do to save your gar-
den in a drought that lasts a month or more?”
Ability to answer that question in a complete and
lucid way should win for the pupil a very high mark
from the teacher. Ability to live up to the answer
in actual operations, if it should become general,
would relieve gardening of its chief drawback, add
very materially to the country’s food supply, and
put an end to the discouragement that is apt to come
annually to all vegetable growers.
Of course the answer in it simplest form— so
simple in fact that it does not explain —is “ irri-
gate and cultivate.” Cultivation with its dry-farm-
ing development is simple enough, whether it be
53
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
with the hand rake and hoe or the larger horse-
drawn substitutes for those simple tools. But irri-
gation is another matter. It is a process that ranges
all the way from watering with a garden hose to
the elaborate engineering projects of the arid sec-
tions of the country. In the Western and South-
western regions of little or no rainfall the problem
has been settled scientifically and adequately, be-
cause the absolute necessity of irrigation to make
the land livable has been recognized.
In the so-called fertile regions next to nothing
has been done, because the gardeners take chances —
long chances — on getting their water supply in the
regular way. But there is scant consolation, as you
contemplate a burned-up garden at the end of a rain-
less July, to know that, according to the law of
averages, you should have had so many generous
inches of rainfall in that very month. That law is
about as useful in a garden in a dry year as the law
still on the statute books of New Jersey prohibiting
a man in that State from kissing his wife on Sun-
day.
As a matter of fact the man who raises things on
the reclaimed, irrigated deserts has a great advan-
54.
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
tage over the supposedly more fortunate grower
elsewhere, who is at the mercy of the weather uncer-
tainties — he can have his water whenever he wants
it and in quantities to suit his needs.
That is just what you should have, no matter in
what part of the country your place may be. If
your garden is small, near the house and in a town
with a public water supply, the hose will do the busi-
ness, after a fashion, if you use it in a thoroughgo-
ing way for real irrigation and not merely for a little
namby-pamby sprinkling of leaves. In a long, dry
season the man with the hose should direct his stream
between the rows and put enough water into each
aisle to flood it. Then the roots will get what they
need. It is a long process, but one treatment a week
of this sort throughout the continuation of the
drought will save the garden, especially if the irri-
gation is supplemented on the next day by sufficient
cultivation to cover the surface with a mulch.
But your garden may be too big for this irriga-
tion by hand, or you may not have the city water
supply. In place of that convenience, however, you
have got a very real problem, the solving of which
is interesting and yields as much satisfaction as the
55
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
first-year gardener gets out of his first ear of corn.
The two main points of the matter are the source
of water supply and the method of its distribution.
If there is a small brook or running stream on the
place, one that does not go dry in summer, a ram
is about as simple a contrivance as there is for send-
ing the water to a storage tank, from which the pipes
or ditches may radiate over the garden or orchard or
directly into the main trench across the highest level
of the area, with smaller ditches running to the plant
rows, carrying the water by gravity. Unless the
garden is an absolutely level stretch of ground the
gravity may be depended upon for doing a great
part of the work of distributing, and the matter will
be greatly simplified by planting the vegetable rows
so they run up and down, rather than across the
slope of the land. That, of course, is true no mat-
ter what the source of supply is.
If no stream or brook is available bore or drive a —
well at or as near the high point of the garden as
a permanent supply of water can be found. Then
install the pump. For a small place the ordinary
hand pump is better than nothing and will justify
the trouble of making the well. A double-action,
56
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
hand force pump that will give a continuous stream
is better still. It will give more water per minute
and will also enable two persons to work at the same
time on the handle, not only saving the garden, but
affording wonderful exercise for the back. Best of °
all is a gasolene engine. A small one-horse affair
of the farm type will cost considerably less than a
hundred dollars, and before it is worn out it will save
much more than a hundred dollars’ worth of fresh
vegetables,
For a garden of a half-acre or more such an en-
gine would be a wise investment if the owner were de-
termined to have it at its best and highest state of
production, year in and year out, regardless of the
lack of rainfall. The engine could also be utilized
in a dozen other ways about the place when not in
commission at the pump.
A fourth choice is the windmill. It costs more
than the gasolene engine and there is no reason in
the world now why one should be used other than the
fact that it looks rather picturesque. With a wind-
mill as the motive power of the irrigation system it
will be necessary to have a storage tank to allow for
the fact that there may be no wind at the time the
57
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
water is most needed. With the engine the tank
can be omitted, for the gasolene will work at any
time and the water can be pumped directly into pipes
or ditches of the distribution system.
On soils made largely of clay a good-sized stream
of water can be carried a long distance in an open
ditch. In sandy, porous gardens it will be necessary
to send the water along in wooden troughs or pipes,
with outlets that can be opened and closed when it
is necessary to supply the various parts of the gar-
den.
But the problem of distribution is a special one
for each garden, depending for its solution on the
character of the soil, the extent of the area to be
watered, and the slopes. The one general fact that
applies to all gardens is that a source of supply
should be established at the top of the land. Get
that first. The rest is best worked out by experi-
menting. Try the open ditches first. If they will not
serve the purpose spend a very little more money and
make V-shaped troughs out of old boards and then
go on and improve the system by changes here and
alterations there, a little each year. It is neither
difficult nor expensive.
58
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
The writer kept a half-acre garden green and
thrifty through two consecutive dry seasons — in
one there was a drought lasting forty-eight days —
by a stream of water pumped by an engine that cost
only seventy dollars new and is still rendering good
service after five years, with not more than twenty
dollars for repairs charged against it.’ The daily
cost of operation was a shade less than a cent for
gasolene and lubricating oil. Irrigation is only an
occasional and incidental use of this machine. Its
regular daily work is to pump water from a well to
an attic tank to supply the dwelling house.
To harness it up for watering the garden it was
only necessary to attach thirty feet of pipe that cost
fifteen cents a foot, and send the water through that
to a big wooden trough running across the top of
the garden, with openings opposite the upper end of
each row between the plants. That is about all there
was to a very simple and inexpensive but useful irri-
gation system.
Spread the first cost over a period of a few years
and it does not average more than the cost of fer-
tilizers and seeds and plants. On the other hand it
assures a supply of water to dissolve the plant foods
59
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
_ that are in the soil, useless to the plants until they
are dissolved, and to distribute these various chemi-
cal foods throughout the soil as well as putting them
in available form for the roots to feed on,
Further than that the water holds in solution
various soil acids that are necessary to the breaking
up of the foods and it means life for the several
forms of bacteria that are essential to plant life.
Don’t underrate water. If all the water needed for
the production of a field of corn could be collected
and impounded on the surface of that same field it
would form a\lake eight inches deep. Nearly every
vegetable that grows in the garden would furnish
equally striking evidence of the great value of mois-
ture. The water required to produce a single hill
of cucumbers would fill a half barrel. —
Recent experiments have shown that the weight of
beans grown on a small irrigated area was three
times that of the weight of the bean crop grown on
the same number of square feet in a garden near by,
consisting of the same quality of soil. The seed was
of the same variety and worth for both plantings,
and the fertilization and cultivation were also the
same. ‘The very material difference was due entirely
60
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
to the supply of water in one bean patch and the
lack of it in the other.
But no matter how dry the ground may seem, no
matter how many days have elapsed since the last
shower, there is always some moisture in the soil.
If you do not want to take the trouble to add to it
and renew it by the artificial means of irrigation you
must at least save what little there is by frequent
cultivation. Water in the soil, whether it comes
from below or from a recent rain, is always making
its way toward the surface, where it evaporates and
is lost, so far as the plants are concerned.
This escape is made possible by the capillarity of
the soil — that is, the fine earth particles form them-
selves naturally into fine vertical lines and the water
climbs these to the surface, just as water will climb
up a towel, as you will see if you will dip the lower
end into a bowl full of water. Of course if you cut
across all the threads of that towel there would be
no ladders for the water to climb on and it would all
stay in the bowl. That is exactly what happens
when you cultivate. You break those fine con-
tinuous lines of soil particles with the rake or hoe
and the water stays beneath the surface, where the
61
WATER WHENEVER NEEDED
roots of the plants can get the benefit of it. But
after a few days the capillarity of the soil restores
itself by a natural process, and that must be offset
by another cultivation. To express the fact in other
words, you must keep constantly on the surface of
- the garden a mulch of dust, which acts as a blanket
to keep the moisture in and may be the salvation
of the garden during the dry weeks of August.
Do not get the notion that irrigation takes the
place of cultivation. If anything it is the other
way about. Water alone, whether supplied natu-
rally or artificially, will not produce good crops with-
out tillage. A well-cultivated garden will do better
in a perfectly dry season than an entirely neglected
garden in a season of normal rainfall.
62
CHAPTER VII
&
GARDEN MISTAKES OF VARIOUS SORTS
Ir you have failed to plough or spade in the fall after
the last flowers and vegetables have been gathered
—an excellent thing for the soil— there may be
some compensation in that very neglect. Fall plough-
ing buries what might serve as all-winter evidence of
blunders that have been made and that evidence is
a good thing to keep in view as a warning for the
season to come. ‘Those rows of wilted, frost-black-
ened vines and bushes, torn by the winds and un-
sightly with mud, tell a useful story. They show,
for one thing, that some seeds were planted where
others would have done better; that this plant had
too much shade and the other not enough; that the
sandy spot at the end of the garden was not put to
its best use; that time might have been saved on cul-
tivation had there been different grouping and classi-
fication in another section.
63
GARDEN MISTAKES
In no enterprise of fun or business can the amateur
make more blunders than in growing things. So the
proper study of a gardener in winter is his old gar-
den with its record of what should have been differ-
ent. It is always in sight from at least one window ©
of the house and the true enthusiast will wander into
' it whenever he can, between seasons, to plan for the
new campaign.
These mistakes are not those of laziness or neglect
but the less obvious errors that any one is apt to make
until he has had the experiences of many summers,
no matter how hard he works, no matter how free
of weeds he keeps his patch. The books will not save
him from all the blunders and the cultural directions
of the seedsmen are not infallible because there were
never two gardens just alike or that required the
same treatment to get the best results. So for each
and every flower bed and vegetable patch there must
be built up a set of rules best adapted to it and based —
on the varying conditions of several seasons. In
other words you must know your garden as the good
skipper knows his boat or the skillful horseman his
mount before you can get the largest response from
its soil.
64
GARDEN MISTAKES
The seedsman may tell you that carrots, parsnips
and melons do best in sandy soil, but the seedsman
cannot come out to your place and dig in your gar-
den until he finds that at one end of it there is more
sand in the loam than at the other end. You may
hit upon the right spot by accident, but there is great
danger you will plant those carrots where the celery
ought to be, in the heaviest soil on the place, and
vice versa. Then poor crops of both celery and car-
rots will be the first indication that something is
wrong. You must find it out and make a shift next
season.
The parsnips may be of excellent growth and yet
not live up to their reputation as a table delicacy.
Probably they were dug too soon. Parsnips should
remain in the ground till after frost to acquire their
best flavour. Another mistake to avoid this year.
Tomatoes need air and plenty of it, although the
ordinary guidebooks never mention that important
fact. So the amateur may follow every rule as to
soil, distance apart and fertilizer for his tomato
plants and then get unsatisfactory fruits because the
plants are too near a wall of corn stalks that cut off
the needed ventilation. If he avoids that difficulty
65
GARDEN MISTAKES
he may neglect to cut out some of the too luxuriant
leaf growth of the plant and the fruit will come to a
poor end, smothered in its own foliage.
Eggplants and peppers need all the sun that is
available; lettuce and peas want shade — two sim-
ple facts, the knowledge of which will mean better
results for four of the vegetables indispensable in a
complete garden. Put the peas and lettuce where
they will get some protection from the heat in the
shadow of the corn or the pole beans. Melons, cu-
cumbers and squash must be in the open, where they
may ramble at will without getting in the way of the
bush plants and without having their own freedom
curtailed. So it goes for every plant in the cata-
logue. No matter how small the garden or how few
the varieties put in it, there is in that patch one
spot better than any other for each particular vege-
table. The problem is to find it, if not this year
then next or the year after. It is one of the many
puzzles that make gardening interesting as well as
healthful and profitable.
In thinning out beets or lettuce after the first
planting you may use the utmost care to have mathe-
matically exact and equal intervals between the plants
66
GARDEN MISTAKES
that are left and still not get the results expected.
It is altogether possible that the roots of the plants
that remained were too much disturbed and never
had a fair chance to do their work of supporting the
season’s growth. ‘That is a common error.
Another mistake and this one the winter evidence
of the garden debris tells very clearly, lies in plant-
ing the same thing in the same place year after year.
Rotation is as much needed in the kitchen garden
as in the fields. No two things take the same chem-
ical plant foods out of the soil in the same propor-
tions, so a change-about gives the land a chance to
recuperate each season from the effect of the chief
drain on its resources in the year before. This year,
for instance, plant the peas where the beets were last
season and make similar changes throughout the
garden. But avoid relocating things in spots that
have proved unsuitable to their peculiar needs.
A different method of getting the benefit of ro-
tation without changing the layout of the garden
from year to year is to shift the soil itself. At one
end of the patch dig a trench the full depth of the
spade. Then shovel the next strip of earth into it,
the third strip into the second trench and so on down
67
GARDEN MISTAKES
the length of the patch, until you fill the last trench
with the earth taken from the first. It is hard work
but effective and, on a small area, worth while. In-
cidentally this process assures much more thorough
breaking up of the soil than ordinary spading.
All plants need food and plenty of it, but no seed,
when put in the ground, should come into direct
contact with large amounts of manure or other fer-
tilizer. Ignorance of this rule accounts for the fail-
ure of many vegetables to sprout.
It is, of course, needless to add that it is better to
have no garden unless the gardener is willing to take
the usual precautions against the worm and insect
pests.
In the late Autumn sit down in a weedy, dried-out,
neglected corner of the garden and make notes, not
merely mental, but with pencil and paper, of all the
evidence of blunders that lies spread out before you.
Then, after putting down all you can actually see at
the fag end of the growing season work your memory
for material of an added record of all those early-in-
the-season mistakes, evidence of which has been hid-
den by time and rubbish and weeds.
When you have finished you will have a chart of
68
GARDEN MISTAKES
errors, a list of mistakes you do not want to repeat
in next year’s garden that will be as useful to you
another spring as a chart of rocks and reefs is to the
skipper making a difficult harbour. Just trying to
remember all the blunders of omission and commis-
sion from one year to the next, without the aid of a
record, will not do at all. You have made too many,
unless you are the one gardener out of a thousand.
A garden diary if religiously kept tells many a tale,
and each tale should be a valuable lesson.
It will be altogether appropriate and also helpful
to follow the botanical plan of classifying your
wrongdoings in the garden under heads and subheads
— the species and varieties, so to speak —in some
such way as this:
Species — NEGLECT
Varieties: Weeds; fungi; insect pests; water—too much
or too little; failure to thin out; failure to pinch back; lack
ef tillage; lack of fertilizer.
Srecies — Favuitry Pian
Varieties: Running rows in wrong direction for easy culti-
vation; bad placing of plants with reference to their special
needs for sun or shade and air and water drainage; bad
placing of plants with reference to each other; placing of plants
without due regard to their special soil requirements.
Species — Favrty Time ScHEDULE
Varieties: Untimely planting for best results; too much or
69
GARDEN MISTAKES
too little of one thing at one time; failure to provide succes-
sion; ignoring possibilities of companion cropping; too long
intervals between harvesting of one vegetable and planting
more of the same thing or something else on the same ground.
Species — Errors oF JUDGMENT
Varieties: Wrong fertilizer or wrong use of fertilizer; using
fungicide instead of insecticide, or vice versa, because of failure
to understand the plant trouble to be cured; failure to watch
weather to take advantage of its changes and to meet its
emergencies.
Of course anybody can add to that list out of his
own experience, but it will serve as a sample. Go
through it again honestly, and see how many charges
there are to which you yourself must plead guilty.
If you can plead not guilty to the weed indictment
the chances are that you have a fairly good answer
to some of the other charges grouped under neglect.
For weeding in itself takes care very largely of the
tillage or cultivation, except the preliminary prepa-
ration of the soil before planting. It also has helped
materially in conserving the soil moisture during a
dry season. But the hoe work and the barnyard or
chemical manure have been time and effort and ma-
terial gone partly to waste if insects or disease have
been allowed the run of the garden. The size and
the flavour of the melons have been considerably be-
low what they should have been if the vines were not
70
GARDEN MISTAKES
pinched off at the ends, and the size and quality of
the tomatoes, the peaches and various other fruits
have been below par if excessive fruits were not
picked off in an early thinning-out process to give
opportunity for a reasonable number to thrive and
be properly nourished within the capacity of the
plants.
The matter of too much or too little water is men-
tioned specifically under the general head of neglect.
If there has been too much, if the seed has rotted
in the ground or blight and mildew have ruined
plants in places that were too damp, it simply means
that your neglect to construct a very simple, inex-
pensive drainage ditch early in the season has ren-
dered your garden or a part of it practically worth-
less. |
If you have not had enough water, if in spite of
all your mulching and dry farming with rake and
hoe and cultivator to prevent surface evaporation
the plants have suffered from lack of moisture, that
has been your fault too. You cannot get a verdict
of acquittal on that charge by pleading that there
has been no rain. You should have irrigated. No
garden is too small to receive that attention, without
71
GARDEN MISTAKES
which it cannot produce, and no garden is located
where some simple device cannot be arranged for
furnishing water.
A little Paris green or some other poison mixed
with bran and spread on the ground when you set
out the young tomato plants would have prevented
the loss of all those vines that were nipped off by the
cutworms. A spray of more Paris green would have
taken care of the potato bugs and given you a good
crop instead of that pateh of shriveled, leafless vines
which you now have to record in your list of failures.
Another half hour with the spray pump, filled with
Bordeaux mixture, would have stopped the wilting
of the vines and given you a crop of melons worth
eating. And so on through the entire list of vege-
tables and the bug and fungous pests which attack
them. |
Perhaps you have been guilty of trying to run a
garden without fertilizer. In that case you are sen-
tenced to six months at hard labour of reading at
least once a week the Government agricultural pam-
phlets on the soil’s need of manure. That about
winds up the various forms of neglect that can be put
down in a general statement. Of course each indi-
72
GARDEN MISTAKES
vidual gardener may have some secret form of fool-
ishness or carelessness which he must remedy for
himself.
The garden may be a difficult, irksome thing to
work because of a faulty plan or no plan at all at
the outset. If you begin haphazard, without a map,
there is no limit to the mistakes you may make later
in the season. Possibly the rows run the short way
of the garden instead of the length of it, thereby
materially increasing the trouble and time required
for thorough cultivation. That, in nine cases out
of ten, is only another way of saying that the thor-
ough cultivation has not been given.
There may have been a map that was all wrong,
a preliminary drawing full of laboriously worked-
out blunders, such as putting the high-growing corn
or pole limas up and down the east side of the garden
where they would serve as a complete barrier to rob
all the low plants of the much-needed forenoon sun.
Potatoes may have been planted last spring where
potatoes had been in the garden of the year before,
and you have wondered all the season why disease
has attacked the vines in spite of everything you
could do to make them thrifty. Peppers that need
73
GARDEN MISTAKES
much sun may have been tucked away in a shady
corner where green peas and lettuce would have done
well, even in the heat of the summer. Failure to
learn at the outset whether there were any soil dif-
ferences within the garden area, with reference to the
amount of sand or clay or humus or moisture, may
have been the cause of putting various things in the
parts least suitable for them, whereas a different ar-
rangement would have provided for each vegetable
the conditions it most needed for good growth and
abundant crop.
Avoid repetition of all this second group of mis-
takes, due to a faulty plan, by having an adequate
garden map; by making use of the record of failures
and successes of this year as a guide to what to do
and not to do next time; by informing yourself as to
the character of your own soil throughout the gar-
den; and by knowing the particular requirements of
each and every vegetable on your planting list, as to
sun, moisture and soil texture and material.
Faults of a defective planting schedule are not so
easy to avoid because the thing aimed at is to have
just enough of each thing throughout the season,
with sufficient surplus for the canning, preserving
74
GARDEN MISTAKES
and storing for winter use. That is obviously a
problem which must be solved for each individual
by himself or herself with reference to many personal
factors. You know what your own blunders of this
sort have been if you have had periods of too much
of some one thing or periods of dearth. One general
rule to help remedy this trouble is to practise a little
self-restraint at the very beginning of the planting
season and then distribute your interest and enthu-
siasm for new plantings throughout the next four
months.
Don’t, for example, go radish mad in April and
then forget to make the succession plantings of bush
beans that are possible all through the season. Esti-
mate as closely as possible the number of peas you
will require at the outset of the cropping season and
then plant just enough to supply that want, making
a supplementary planting a week later, and so on
throughout the season with all the vegetables for
which there is time for two or more crops.
And in this matter of succession planting do not
forget the possibilities of companion cropping —
that is the planting of two things together in the
same plat, one of which will mature quickly and be
75
GARDEN MISTAKES
disposed of before the slow-growing companion gets
to the stage where it requires all the plant food and
moisture within the given area for its own use.
Having a good schedule will not only furnish an even
supply of food for the table but will enable you to
get the maximum results from every inch of your
garden.
16
———
CHAPTER VIttl
Re
TARING: PLAN TING: CUES FROM NA
TURE
Do not take the printed almanacs and seed-planting
calendars too literally. In this matter the moderns,
though they have done much to better some other
things, cannot improve on the customs of the an-
cients. It is safer and saner, for example, to follow
the good old rule of planting corn when the apple
trees blossom than to plant corn, regardless of
weather and soil conditions, on a day set down in a
book that was written months before anybody knew
what sort of season was coming. Furthermore the
apple blossom and other homely suggestions apply
wherever the garden happens to be, while the printed
calendar has to be revised not only for weather but
for every material difference in latitude or altitude.
This business of having a garden is, after all, an
adventure with Nature herself and cues for its vari-
T7
CUES FROM NATURE
ous processes must come from her to be reliable.
There is no lack of them, from the flowering of the
first wild violet on the sunny side of the road to the
glory of the goldenrod. They are much more pic-
turesque and fascinating than dates and are easier
to remember.
So why not plant the peas and the onions when
the peach trees put out their first blossoms or the
new grape leaves begin to unfold? Try to get the
beet seed in on the day the cherry tree bursts into
bloom. Let the lilac and forsythia, the dandelion
and the dogwood become associated in your mind,
year after year, with some of the early garden activi-
ties and you will soon be independent of any man-
made calendar and able to astonish your neighbour
with expert advice, for your authority will be better
than his. It is all right to plant at a certain fixed
period in an average year as to weather and ground
conditions, but if it is an unusual season, ahead or
behind the normal, Nature’s own signs will tell you
when the books will not.
Keep a record, a garden diary, of all these things.
Be as statistical as you like on the number of square
feet you plant and the number of bushels or dozens
78
CUES FROM NATURE
you harvest and the estimated market value thereof.
More important still, write down when and under
what conditions of soil and weather you do things and
what Nature is doing in her larger garden about you
at the same time. -It is that sort of a diary, kept
through a series of years, that gives a man the real
lore of gardens and makes him a true gardener.
In the greater part of the United States each
square foot of Everyman’s Garden may be made to
produce two good crops within one season and there
are a few combinations whereby a part of the garden
may produce three crops.
But to get this maximum output from his soil and,
incidentally, have a midsummer renewal of his early
spring hopes and enthusiasms, the gardener must
chart his ground and plan his time with the accuracy
of a railroad time-table and then adhere as closely
to the programme as weather and other conditions
will permit. It is essential that the plan adopted in
the spring be for all summer. The owner of the
garden must know not only what and where he is
going to plant first, but what and where he is going
to plant three, even four months hence, and also
what crop will follow another.
79
CUES FROM NATURE
Two bits of information are essential at the out-
set: What is the total number of days in any given
part of the country during which plant growth may
be expected — that is, what is the maximum interval
between the last killing frost of spring and the first
killing frost of fall, as based on averages of previous
years for the particular region in which the garden
is located? Second, what is the approximate inter-
val for each vegetable between the planting of the
seed and the end of harvesting the crop?
With these facts known, all sorts of combinations
are possible in the way of rotation and succession.
These two things are not exactly the same; at least
there is enough difference to make explanation worth
while. Succession is the planting of the same vege-
table, peas for instance, on the installment plan —
that is, one row on the first of April, a second row
on the seventh, and so on. By this system the gar-
dener will begin to have peas from the second row by
the time he has gathered the last pod from the first,
thus assuring himself of an uninterrupted supply all
summer.
Rotation, on the other hand, would be the putting
of beans or potatoes where the peas have been as soon
Py
CUES FROM NATURE
as the planting of peas has yielded its crop and the
vines have been pulled up. Both succession and ro-
tation are necessary if the garden is to amount to all
it is capable of.
According to the law of averages as applied to
killing frosts there are two hundred and fourteen
days of plant growth that may be depended upon
each year in the temperate parts of the United
States, beginning with April first and ending Octo-
ber thirty-first. There is no vegetable annual that
requires so much of that time that there isn’t time
left for at least one other crop.
The chart at the end of this chapter showing how
the same ground may he used to advantage two and
three times, is based on actual performance in a com-
muter’s vegetable garden in Middle New Jersey.
Each of the horizontal sections covers one piece of
ground in one season. All of the second-planting
possibilities as enumerated in the sixth column of
the chart have been tried out in different years with
reasonable success. In only two years did the third
plantings amount to anything worth while. But
that does not affect the theory of the plan.
Of course the two sections taken for the chart did
81
CUES FROM NATURE
not cover the whole garden. ‘There was corn planted
elsewhere in May as well as the planting in June to
follow the early peas. In still other parts of the
garden there were varieties not mentioned at all in
the chart. The illustration is given rather as an
example of garden planning than as a guide of what
seeds to plant. That must be determined by Every-
man and his family according to their own vegetable
likes and dislikes and their appetites.
Here are the planting directions and statistics
relative to the time for maturity required by all the
common vegetables, which will enable every gardener
to make his own chart in advance for all of the com-
ing season. ‘They are grouped according to the
months in which the first and successive plantings
of each sort should be begun.
STARTING IN APRIL
Beets — Plant in April, May, June, July. Seventy days to -
first of harvest. Thin out to four inches apart in the rows;
rows a foot apart. One ounce of seed for fifty feet.
Brussers Sprouts— Plant in April, May, June. About one
hundred and ten days to harvest. Plants two feet apart in
rows, rows two feet apart. One-eighth of an ounce of seed
for fifty feet.
Karty Casspace — Plant in April. About one hundred and
ten days to harvest. Plants two feet apart, rows two feet
apart. One-eighth of an ounce of seed for fifty plants. It is
82 \
CUES FROM NATURE
better to buy the plants and set them out than to raise the
cabbage from seed.
Earty Carrot— Plant in April. About seventy-five days
to harvest. Thin out to four inches apart, rows a foot apart.
Half an ounce of seed for fifty feet.
Earty Cauiirtower — Plant in April. About one hundred
and twenty days to harvest. Plants two feet apart, rows two
feet apart. One-eighth of an ounce of seed for fifty feet.
Cetrery— Plant in April. Ready for use in October.
Plants five inches apart, rows three feet apart. One-eighth
of an ounce of seed for fifty feet of row.
Ewnpvive — Plant in April, May, June, July. About eighty-
five days to harvest. Plants a foot apart, rows a foot apart.
Half an ounce of seed for fifty feet of row.
Kout-Rasi — Plant in April, May, June. Ready in about
seventy-five days. Plants a foot apart, rows a foot and a half
apart. One-eighth of an ounce of seed for fifty feet.
Leek — Plant in April and May. Ready for use in one hun-
dred and forty days. Plants six inches apart, rows a foot
apart. Half an ounce of seed for fifty feet.
Letruce — Plant in April, May, June, July, to middle of
August. Ready for use in eighty days. Thin out to eight
inches apart, rows a foot and a half apart. One-eighth of
an ounce of seed for fifty feet.
Onion — Plant in April and May. Ready for use in about
one hundred and thirty-five days. Plants three inches apart,
rows a foot apart. Half an ounce of seed for fifty feet. It
is better to get onion sets —a pint and a half for fifty feet of
row — put them out in the same month that you would plant
the seed and at the same distance apart.
Parsnip — Plant in April. Ready for use in four months,
but is improved in flavor if left in the ground until after frost.
Plants four inches apart, rows a foot apart. One-quarter
ounce seed for fifty feet.
Peas — Plant in April, May, June, July. Ready for use in
83
CUES FROM: NATURE
sixty days. Plants two inches apart, rows two feet apart.
Stake the rows with brush for the plants to cling to.
Porators — Plant in April and May —be sure to wait until
ground is well dried out. Ready to dig in about ninety days.
Plant in ‘hills two feet apart each way. One peck of seed
potato for every fifty hills.
RapisH — Plant in small quantities all summer from the
first of April to the end of September. Ready for use in
thirty-five days. Plants two inches apart, rows ten inches
apart. Half an ounce of seed for fifty feet.
Sausrry — Plant in April and May. Ready for use in about
one hundred and sixty days. Plants six inches apart, rows two
feet apart. An ounce of seed for every fifty feet.
Srprnacn# — Plant any time from first of April to the middle
of September. Frost will not hurt spinach if it is covered
with a little straw. Ready for use in about seventy days.
Plants four inches apart, rows a foot apart. Half an ounce
of seed for fifty feet of row.
Turnip — Plant in April, May, June, July, August; some
varieties may be planted as late as the middle of September.
Ready for use in seventy days. Plants six inches apart, rows
a foot apart. Half an ounce of seed to fifty feet of row.
Startine in May
Busy Brans— Plant in May, June, July, August. Har-
vest begins in about fifty days. Plants three inches apart,
rows two feet apart. One pint of seed for every fifty feet.
Lima anp Pore Beans— Plant in May and June. Ready in
about eighty days. Set poles three feet apart in rows three
feet apart. <A pint of seed for every fifty hills.
Late Cassace — Plant in May and June. Harvest in the
early winter and store in a good vegetable cellar or bury in a
pit. Plants two feet apart, rows two feet apart. One-quarter
of an ounce of seed for fifty feet of row.
Late Carrot — Plant in May, June, July. About one hun-
dred and ten days to maturity. Plants four inches apart,
84
f
CUES FROM NATURE
rows a foot and a half apart. Half an ounce of seed for fifty
feet of row.
Late CavLirLtower — Plant in May and June. Ready to
use in one hundred and twenty-five days. Plants two feet
apart, rows two feet apart. One-eighth of an ounce of seed
for fifty feet of row.
Corn — Plant from the first of May to the middle of July.
Harvest begins in eighty to ninety days. Plant in hills three
feet apart each way. A pint of seed for every hundred hills.
Cucumper — Plant in May and June. Picking begins in
about seventy days. Plant in hills four feet apart each way.
Half an ounce of seed for thirty hills.
Metons — Plant in May and June. Harvest begins in about
one hundred days. Plant in hills four feet apart each way.
Half an ounce of seed for thirty hills.
Pumpxin — Plant in May and June. Ready in about one
hundred and twenty days. Plant in hills five feet apart each
way. Plant ten seeds in each hill, but pull all but the three
healthiest-looking plants from each hill as soon as they appear.
CrookED-NECK SuMMER SquasH — Plant in May, June, July.
Harvest begins in about seventy days. Plant in hills four feet
apart each way. Half an ounce of seed for twenty-five hills.
Winter SauasH — The same time, distance and seed allow-
ances as for pumpkins.
Eceriant, Peppers anp Tomators— Buy the plants and set
them out in the latter part of May. Tomatoes and eggplants
three feet apart each way; peppers two feet apart each way.
The harvest should continue through the greater part of July,
August and September if the right assortments of early and
late plants are obtained. To raise these three plants from
seed they must be started under glass in March.
85
yovurdg 10 diuiny, 7}
‘YSIPeY ‘FL toquieydec) gp | ¢ On. tt Ss aeag 10 |
; 93 | L 0s |° ° *° 90nq}0'T Jo
sr | OL 98 |* * * sAlpuy ao
SulyjOoN 4] $§ | OL OL |* * waquimonyg so SIT) 16 of | 1 Avy_euvog ysng
| Ilse jor | og |° + ° * wsogao
| jeuou] §€ OLL |* * 3OL1B—d o]¥’T JO |
ysipey “Fs taquioydeg} gg | ¢ OL | * syoog ‘TT Aug}
SUIQION ‘“E] 12q03200] 6I | °° G61 |AOMOPI[NVD 94v"T 10
SUINJON ‘Og Aoquiaqdag! HE | OT OOL |* * °* suopayT 10
SUIQION “OL 1040790] FB | OL OIL |synoadg sjossnag 10 ©
Ysipey “OT zequiaqdac| $9 | -- 0) | et Ree oe ca Coe OP C0) re
youurdg 30 druany, VOL; OL 09 |TIsdyj)" * svag
“‘Ysipey “Ol roqumaydas| $F | OT 08S. S- = = WN 10
yore)
10 Ysipey ‘peyeg a10og
*99n4497 “FL ysn3ny| 08 | FI o¢ jsuvog ysng ‘ol =
FE LEE gos Se EE See! Fe
SAILIIIaISsod Za}a a ime SAILITIAISSOd Za |fa jsnsa Z a
DNLLNV"Id-dulnL Ze |ho| 23! onmnviaanoogs | Zn 5 o | bea Eo. | ae eae
QS | 643 Ss ° Qa |W "pe FA ‘d
a a
LUVH)-IKIJ, NIGUV VY
CHAPTER IX
@
A eT BE PE So Wi em
Have you an accumulation of the winter’s wood
ashes and are you doubtful as to the best use to
which they may be put in the garden? The straw-
berry bed is hungry for them. ‘They will renew the
soil’s supply of potash and that is a good plant food
for fruit.
Rake in the ashes now, or as soon as the ground is
rakable, and there will be better and larger berries
and more of them in June. Even a few pounds of
ashes scattered over an area of twenty square feet
will be effective, but choose a still day for the work,
because this fertilizer is too useful to be wasted by
being blown away.
Strawberries do not require more plant food in
the long run for all the various stages of their
growth than other products of the garden, but they
want most of it in a comparatively short time, be-
87
APRIL—THE FIRST WEEK
cause the interval between the start of the spring
growth and the fruiting is brief. The making of
the berries is a terrific strain on the plant and it
must be helped. To appreciate what the help
means, compare the diminutive wild strawberry that
grows by the wayside without care and the wonder-
ful cultivated berry of the garden.
This cultivation of the strawberry has been going
on now for 260 years and fertilization has been one
of the chief factors in its development. So no gar-
dener should neglect his own patch. As already
said, the wood ashes will provide the potash. A
small quantity of bone meal — say, a pound to twenty
square feet — will give the soil what phosphoric acid
is needed for the plant and even less nitrate of soda
will provide the needed nitrogen.
These chemical fertilizers are much easier to
handle than barnyard manure, quicker in their bene-
ficial effect on the plants and cost less unless you —
happen to have a horse of your own or a horse-own-
ing neighbour who has no garden.
But if the soil of the strawberry patch is thin —
that is, lacking in decomposed vegetable matter — it
is better to use the barnyard manure either as a sub-
88
APRIL—THE FIRST WEEK
stitute for the chemicals or in addition to them.
Only the old manure that is thoroughly rotted should
be applied, however, as that fresh from the stable
may be full of weed seeds, and no plant is so helpless
against weeds, so quickly and easily throttled out
of existence, as the strawberry.
If there is no strawberry bed on the place already
one should be started in April if the ground is suffi-
ciently free from moisture and in good working con-
dition. Buy only new plants, less than a year old,
from first sets rooted from runners. One hundred
plants altogether, including the early and late fruit-
ing varieties to give a succession, will make an ample
patch for one family and from this nucleus the gar-
dener may go on, year after year, getting new plants
from the runners of the old and shifting the location
of the patch every second year at least, to get the
best results.
This shifting is to avoid the dangers of plant dis-
ease from using the same ground for the same thing
too often. In the case of strawberries the bed may
be allowed to shift itself in this way: Each plant
puts out one or more runners and from the end of
each of these which goes into the ground a new plant
89
APRIL—THE FIRST WEEK
starts. By placing the ends of these runners just
where the new plants are wanted a new row may be
grown parallel to the old one and far enough away
from it to escape any dangers there may be in the
ground from the old plants. The following season,
after the space of the first row has been thoroughly
cleaned, the process may be reversed and the runners
trained back to the original row.
For a new patch select ground that has been under
cultivation during the previous year or two. Soil
in which corn or beans or potatoes have grown is
best. Avoid sod land by all means, unless it has
had a great deal of white clover growing with the
grass; otherwise the newly turned-up ground is apt
to be filled with worms and other pests fatal to good
strawberry growth.
There is no way of getting much fruit this sum-
mer from plants set out this spring. But if you
wait until fall the crop of next season will not be so
abundant as from plants set out now. One season’s
preliminary work without fruit is worth while for a
first-class bed. There are two good ways of plant-
ing. The first one is to make a hole big enough
round to hold all the roots freely spread out like the
90
APRIL—THE FIRST WEEK
ribs of an open umbrella. Then take the plant by
the crown between the thumb and finger, twirl it till
the roots spread and drop it into place. Planted in
this manner every root is sure of opportunity to do
its work and get its share of moisture and plant
food out of the soil.
In puchasing the plants, by-the-way, pay more
attention to their roots than to their leaves. An
abundance of the former is what is wanted. If the
leaves are too thick it is even well to pull off a few
of them to reduce the foliage surface through which
the moisture can evaporate above ground, robbing
the roots.
The second method of planting is quicker and ac-
complishes the same thing. Shove a spade into the
ground the full depth of its blade and then push
the handle over, making a V-shaped opening in the
ground. Spread the roots of the plant fan-fashion
and hold them against one side of the V while the
earth is pulled back against them by thrusting the
spade into the ground just beyond the first opening
and pulling the handle toward you. This method
also assures the proper contact of each root and
rootlet with the earth.
91
APRIL—THE FIRST WEEK
Let that earth be a sandy loam if it is available.
That is the ideal soil for strawberries, although with
proper treatment they will grow almost anywhere.
If there is plenty of room that can be devoted to
the berries, set them out in hills with rows three feet
apart and the same distance between the plants.
That allows of more thorough cultivation and gives
each plant a larger share of the moisture and rich-
ness of the soil. Naturally the berries are larger,
richer in flavour and more attractive in shape and
colour. But planting that way is a luxury.
The usual method and, if space is limited, the only
sensible way is to plant in rows. Begin by putting
the plants in a single row, twelve inches apart.
Have a space of four feet between the rows at the
outset, for part of that ground is to be filled in with —
new plants from the runners of the old. Let these
runners take possession of the ground for a foot on
either side of the original row, making altogether
what is known as the matted row. Then in turn
the runners from this can have the ground still left
and, as soon as this last set of plants is established,
the original row, which has produced fruit for two
seasons, can be dug up.
92
APRIL—THE FIRST WEEK
This renews the bed practically within the same
part of the garden originally devoted to it, and the
patch may be worked, back and forth within that
area for years if enough fertilizer is put on and if
sufficient care is taken to keep the ground free from
pests. One precaution is to cut off all the old leaves
as soon as fruiting is over, for on this dead foliage
the injurious insects find their best breeding and
hiding places.
Also at the end of the fruit production, the plants
are usually in great need of weeding and cultivation.
The earth has been packed by the daily pressure of
the shoes of the berry pickers and it is just the season
when weeds are making their greatest strides toward
taking possession of the garden. Loosen up the
ground thoroughly and get rid of all vegetation that
does not belong there.
All strawberry plants do not produce perfect flow-
ers — that is, flowers with both the male and female
organs for propagating themselves— so in every
patch there must be some perfect plants that the
pollen from their stamens can fertilize the other
plants. At least one-fourth of the patch should be
of the perfect plants scattered among the others.
93
APRIL—THE FIRST WEEK
A mulch must be put on in the fall and kept on
through the winter. It serves as a protection from
the cold and so prevents, in great measure, the alter-
nate freezing and thawing of the ground and the
consequent heaving of the plants and tearing of the
roots. In the spring the leaves or straw of this
mulch retain the moisture in the soil and also prevent
the weeds from starting. Of course they answer the
same purpose all through the season, and when the
berries begin to ripen and bend the vines with their
weight the mulch keeps the fruit from the ground
and thus saves many berries from spoiling before
they can be picked.
But it is an excellent thing to take this mulch off
at least once in the spring, give the ground a good
cultivation with the hoe and then rake the straw
back, taking care to leave the plants themselves free.
94
CHAPTER X
&
Ae es LTE Se) SE COR DW Ss ee
Two vegetables that Everyman likes to have on his
table, in season and out, but which, strangely enough,
are seldom found in Everyman’s Garden, are aspara-
gus and celery. Why does the average amateur
leave them out of his plan? Probably because grow-
ing them carries him a little beyond the primary
stage of planting something as simple as the squash
or beans, and because in things agricultural, more
than in anything else, matters that he does not know
about seem too technical and difficult for a layman to
undertake.
But the difficulty begins to disappear as soon as
an actual start is made to have celery and asparagus
in your own garden. The beginning for both plants
should be made within the first half of the month of
April.
The only objection to asparagus is that you have
95
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
to wait so long for results — two years if you set out
one-year-old roots and three years if you start with
seed. But the use of the ground is not entirely lost,
for while Everyman is waiting for his first crop he
can use the space between the asparagus rows for
other vegetables.
Against the single disadvantage of the long wait
there are many things on the other side. Asparagus
comes earlier in the season than anything else. It is
very prolific, and it loses very little of its flavour
and succulence in being canned in the home kitchen
for winter use. There is much to be said in, its
favour as a very wholesome article of food. The
ancient Romans used it as a medicine. And — this
is the main thing — nothing is more palatable.
Asparagus is one of the most easy-going, least
exacting plants in the garden. It will grow and
even produce fairly good crops on almost any soil if
it has proper cultivation and enough fertilization, so
very few gardeners can plead unfitness of ground as
a sufficient excuse for not having a bed of “ grass.”
But, as with everything else, there is the one ideal
sort of soil best adapted to this particular plant, and
that one is of the light sandy variety, reasonably rich
96
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
in plant food. Furthermore it should be free of
stones and old roots and all other rubbish that might
get in the way of the tender sprouts shooting their
way toward the surface.
Sunshine, and much of it, is absolutely essential,
so in selecting the site for the bed attention should
be given not only to the character of the soil, but to
the surroundings. No trees, bushes or fences should
be near enough to throw any shadows on the surface
of the bed. On the other hand there must be some
protection from north and east winds. This is best
obtained by planting on ground with a gentle south-
erly slope — due south if possible. This slope not
only serves as a protection from the north wind, but
affords the maximum amount of sunshine. Another
device to get the full benefit of the sun’s warmth in
early spring is to run the rows north and south.
Everyman is justified in hiring a ploughman for
the main work of making his asparagus bed even if he
dees dig all the rest of the garden himself. Of
course he can make the asparagus bed with his spade
if he wants to be very thrifty or has a notion that as
a matter of sentiment he wants to be able to look
upon his finished garden and declare proudly that he
97
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
did every inch of it himself. But the sentiment must
have the energetic support of a good strong back in
_ this case, and two or three dollars would pay for all
the work that the man with the plough need be called
upon to do in the preparation of this part of the
garden.
In either case it is necessary to have a trench a
foot deep and at least a foot wide at the bottom, so
the many roots radiating from the crown of each
plant may be spread out well and lie in a natural,
uncramped position from the outset. The old
method was to dig the trench a foot and a half deep
and fill in the bottom to the depth of six inches with
barnyard manure, cover that with a thin layer of
earth and then put in the roots. But that is un-
necessary and a waste of time, energy and manure,
because the scientific agricultural experts have dem-
onstrated that the feeding roots of the asparagus
plant extend laterally rather than downward and get
little, if any, benefit from fertilizer placed beneath
the crowns of the roots — a demonstration for which
the man who is to do his own work of spading should
feel very grateful to science.
The length of the row of course depends on the
98
SE ee
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
space in the garden that may be devoted to the as-
paragus bed. Roots should not be set closer than
eighteen inches apart, and two feet should be the
minimum distance between the rows. If there is
plenty of room in the garden the distance between
the rows may be increased to advantage. However
a strip ten feet by thirty — that is, five rows, each
thirty feet long — would afford space for one hun-
dred roots, an ample patch for the family. If not
more than half that space were available it would
still be well worth while to start an asparagus bed.
Good one-year-old roots may be bought at the
rate of seventy-five cents a hundred. They will fur-
nish all the asparagus, cut fresh every morning dur-
ing the season, that the family can use, with some
left over for canning. A single bunch of asparagus
costs about twenty-five cents at the store.
A new crown grows each year a fraction of an
inch above the old one, so the underground system
of the plant is coming nearer the surface all the time.
As an asparagus bed is good for a dozen years or
more sufficient depth must be allowed at the outset.
The only objection to deep planting is that the crop
is not so early in the first few years, but that can be
99
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
offset in part by hoeing out between the rows early
in the spring so the sun’s heat will penetrate to the
roots more readily and start them into quicker ac-
tion. After growth starts the earth should be raked
back where it belongs, making the surface of the
entire bed level. Ridging up must be resorted to if
it is Everyman’s fancy to raise white asparagus, as
the earth banked against the spears is what bleaches
them. For green asparagus this is not necessary.
To get something from the ground while waiting
for the first yield of asparagus there is no harm in
planting some such plant as the pea or bean between
the rows, especially if enough ground is used to make
that space three or four feet wide. This will not
hurt the asparagus roots in the least; on the con-
trary it will be a good thing, because the presence of
the peas or beans will assure more thorough cultiva- -
tion. Asparagus, like everything else in the garden,
needs a lot of care and the more the bed is hoed the
better. Also it needs an ample supply of plant food
or fertilizer. If barnyard manure is used, as it cer-
tainly should be for at least a part of the fertilizer,
be sure it is old and thoroughly decomposed. If it is
fresh it will be too hot, and the young spears coming
100 :
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
up through it will rust. Supplement the barnyard
manure, thereby decreasing the quantity of it neces-
sary, by adding wood ashes which are rich in pot-
ash.
If these are not available buy a little muriate of
potash from the seedsman. By the ton it costs
forty-five dollars, so in small quantities it should not
cost more than three or four cents a pound. Five
pounds would be ample for the small asparagus bed
when used in addition to half a load of barnyard
manure. ‘To get a perfectly balanced fertilizer for
asparagus it would be Well to add ten pounds of phos-
phate. This costs only about a third as much as
the potash. For the necessary nitrogen it is safe
enough to depend on the supply of nitrate contained
in the manure itself.
A third possibility is to use chemicals altogether
in alternate years, or oftener if the soil is already
sufficiently supplied with humus or organic matter
such as the straw and other decomposed vegetable
portion of the manure. This suggestion is offered
because it is so much easier to obtain and handle the
chemicals, and so much less in bulk is required.
Every seedsman carries a special mixture adapted to
101
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
the requirements of each variety of plant, and if you
find you can depend upon him for good seed you may
take it for granted that his chemicals will be honest
too.
The time to fertilize is in the spring and summer
during the growth of the stalks after the cutting sea-
son. It is then that the crowns are forming the new
buds from which the edible sprouts of the next season
will come, and therefore it is then that the roots need
and assimilate the food needed for those sprouts.
Apply the fertilizer as a surface dressing, not
directly on top of the rows just above the line of
crowns, but on either side. Work most of it into
the soil by raking, but leave some of the manure
on the surface to serve as a mulch to block the weeds
and prevent the evaporation of moisture.
In the first two years of bearing do not cut the
spears for the table for more than three weeks. After
the bed is well established and thrifty the daily crop
may be taken for six or seven weeks. When the
season for cropping is over the tops will quickly
develop into high, bushy plants and go to: seed.
Wait until the berries are fully coloured, then cut
everything down clean, burn the rubbish to get rid
102
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
of insects and disease germs, and that finishes the
business of the asparagus bed for the year.
A fungous disease, called rust, and the beetle are
the two chief pests that attack asparagus. To com-
bat the rust, spray with Bordeaux mixture, with
Paris green or arsenate of lead added, as soon as the
cutting season is over, and clean up the ground very
thoroughly in the fall so as to destroy any infected
plants and leave no place for pests to winter. To
get rid of beetles and grubs, dust with fresh lime
when the morning dew is on the plants. If you have
chickens turn them loose in the patch and they will
_ make short work of the insects.
BEST SOIL FOR CELERY.
To produce celery in the greatest abundance, on a
market-garden scale, for example, the black boggy
soil known as “ muck” is best; but to produce the
plant in small quantities, say an all-winter supply
for the family, a moist, sandy loam, even a soil with
lots of clay in it, is better than the muck, because
celery grown in loam has a finer flavour and keeps
better. Fortunately Everyman’s Garden is more
apt to be of sand or clay than of muck.
The time for beginning out-of-door celery work,
103
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
either with seed or with plants purchased from the
seedsman or home-grown under glass, is April. It
is not too late now to start with seed for next win-
ter’s supply or even for the Thanksgiving dinner.
But for an early-fall crop the plants must be pur-
chased in April, if you have not raised them your-
self. Set the plants six inches apart in rows that
are three feet apart. If seed is used there must
be some preliminary work to get good results. In
the first place do not select celery seed as one of the
things to economize on. Do not get the cheapest
sort in the catalogue, but the best, not only because
of the quality of the plant it will produce but for the
greater assurance that it will grow. The seed of
this plant, which is a biennial, producing seed the
second season and then dying, loses its vitality very
quickly. It is a waste of time, effort and ground
space to plant seed more than a year old.
But even good seed must have the best possible
conditions under which to begin growth. The fol-
lowing instructions apply to the preparation of the
soil, whether the start is made with seeds or plants:
If the soil contains much clay break it up and im-
prove its texture by spading or ploughing in a lot of
104
| APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
barnyard manure. A wheelbarrow load for every
twelve feet of row is about right. If the soil is thin
and sandy use barnyard manure, too, to furnish the
required humus. Of course this manure will furnish
fertilizer as well as improve the mechanical condition
of the soil, but for a quicker-acting plant food, one
that will begin to serve the plants from the very out-
set of their growth, get some chemical fertilizer,
which may be purchased in small quantities and costs
but a few cents a pound.
Potash is the main thing. A mixture containing
two pounds of potash and a pound each of nitrate of
soda and phosphoric acid will properly enrich two
twenty-foot rows. Work it in thoroughly over a
strip about two feet wide, down the centre of which
the plants are to be set out at six-inch intervals.
This fertilizer may be used in addition to the barn-
yard manure, or without it if the soil is sufficiently
supplied with humus.
Another ingredient that will help — it is very nec-
essary if the ground is sour—jis lime. As already
explained in the third chapter of this book, the test
for sourness is very simply and accurately made by
a bit of blue litmus paper that the druggist sells
105
APRIL—THE SECOND WEES
for a few cents. Touch the paper to the moist-
ened earth; if it turns red the ground needs lime.
Another trick that is practicable in a small garden
and is worth trying is to sprinkle salt along the row
and work it in — about a pint to every twenty feet.
This will be absorbed by the celery plants and their
flavour improved by it. After growth is well under
way add a little nitrate of soda along either side of
the row and rake it in.
So much for the things that should be added to
the soil. Fully as important is the working of it
into proper texture. Let the preliminary spading
or ploughing be deep enough to assure a layer of five
inches of well-pulverized soil when the preparation
is completed. Rake or harrow both ways after the
digging and repeat the process as often as may be —
the more of that the better — and put on the finish-
ing touches by smoothing with a board. For the
seedbed itself put the surface soil through a sieve
with a reasonably fine mesh.
Seed may be sowed broadcast in the preliminary
bed and when the plants appear three weeks later,
perhaps a little sooner than that, they can be thinned
out so that each remaining plant will have sufficient
106
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
room to make the first month of its growth. After
that comes the transplanting to permanent rows.
This extra work of shifting the plants from one place
to another has a very definite purpose in the care
of celery. The plant if left to itself puts down a
very long taproot and almost no _ lateral-growing
roots, which are necessary to produce the most de-
sirable plants. ‘Transplanting serves to break that
taproot and then, in the new bed, the lateral growth
begins and makes up for the loss. Of course, you
can get celery without transplanting, but the other
way is much better. The seed, which is very small,
should be covered as lightly as possible.
Showery, misty sort of weather is the best for seed-
planting or setting out and transplanting, and if you
ean hit it just right to do the work between two
gentle showers an excellent start will be made.
When transplanting dig up the seedlings in such a
way that the earth will cling to the roots. Moisture
is essential. To make sure of it firm the soil well
about the plants and then cover with a mulch of
loose dry earth, of straw or old leaves or manure.
The manure is best, but care should be taken to keep
it, as well as all other dirt, out of the heart cf the
107
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
plant itself. Sprinkle the mulch and let the water
percolate through to the soil and then to the roots.
This should be done after sunset. Don’t overdo this
moistening, however, for that would cause what is
known in celery as “ damping off.” No artificial
watering should be given after the crop has got a
good start.
Deep cultivation after the plants have started
must be avoided, for those lateral roots, already re-
ferred to, grow very near the surface and must not
be disturbed. A shallow-working scuffle hoe is a
good tool for the weeding and a light raking is suf-
ficient to keep the surface of the soil fine and loose
and therefore a bar to the evaporation of moisture.
Blanching of celery is not a difficult or a mysteri-
ous thing at all. Nevertheless it is the barrier that
needlessly keeps this very desirable plant out of so —
many family gardens. It is an added process, some-
thing different from the simple picking of other veg-
etables, and so the amateur is apt to hold the
mistaken notion that celery raising is only for the
professional.
Blanching of the celery is not primarily to make it
white, although that, too, is an advantage, but rather
108
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
to improve the edible quality of the plant.’ Wild
celery is a tough plant with woody, fibrous stalks of
rank flavour that nobody would care to munch.
Somebody once discovered, probably by accident,
that excluding the light from the plant did away
with this woodiness and produced the crisp, tender
celery that is so appetizing. Incidentally the ex-
clusion of the light prevents the plants from becom-
_ ing green, as darkness always destroys the natural
colouring matter of leaves.
This blanching part of the work may be done with
boards or earth equally well. If boards are used
get old ones, as new lumber is apt to give a disagree-
able flavour to the plant. Tilt the tops of the boards
toward each other as far as the tops of the plants
will permit, thus forming an A-tent-like contrivance,
open a little at the top. The upper edges can be
held together by nailing bits of lath across. Throw
some earth against the boards on the outside to pre-
vent light from creeping in through the cracks under
_ the bottom edges. |
Another excellent way — the best way for a small
number of plants if Everyman wants to spend a
little money to get perfection—is to use short
109
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
lengths of earthenware pipe, the ordinary farm-drain
tile, with an inside diameter of four inches.
Slip a tile over each plant, after it is nearly
grown, something like a flower vase without any bot-
tom, with the top leaves projecting in a green bunch
and the stalks whitening below entirely out of the
light. Use the unglazed pipe for this purpose, be-
cause the rapid evaporation from the dull surface
_ keeps the inclosed plant cool and crisp and gives you
a ripened product that is unsurpassed.
The simplest, cheapest way is to bank the stalks
with earth, after tying the leaves together, not too
tightly, so that the growth will be compact and as a
precaution against dirt getting into the heart of the
plant and rotting it. Banking with earth requires
spade work for the most part, but there should be
some heaping up and patting by hand to see that all.
the outer surfaces of all the stalks are covered.
Do not try to use straw or leaves for blanching
purposes because they are in a constant process of
decomposition and may rot the celery. They are
sure to give it a musty, disagreeable flavour.
The winter supply may be kept where the plants
are grown by covering sufficiently with earth, with
110
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
some manure over that, to keep out the frost. Then
dig it out, a bunch or two at a time, as it is needed.
One of the commonest diseases of the celery crop
is “damping off,” caused by a fungus that attacks
young plants and rots them at the point of contact
with the earth. Careless watering at the outset is
the cause of this. One effective way of avoiding the
trouble is to start the seed in shallow boxes instead
of in the open ground. Bore a few holes in the bot-
tom and set the box in a tray of water. This assures
the roots of plenty of moisture without danger of
rotting or damping off the young leaves.
Prevention rather than cure must be provided
against celery blight because if it gets a start, as it
is apt to in long-continued hot, sticky weather, the
plant will droop, just as humans do in the same sort
of weather, and either die or grow into a very poor
quality of celery. Spraying with Bordeaux mix-
ture containing a weak ammoniacal solution of cop-
per once a fortnight will ward off this disease.
Grasshoppers, celery caterpillars, celery-leaf tiers,
and the tarnished plant bug are the insect enemies.
The tiers are a double nuisance, not only eating the
leaves but spinning webs about them. The tiers and
111
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
caterpillars are best destroyed by hand-picking.
Paris green, mixed with bran and scattered on the
ground, will put an end to the grasshoppers.
THE RAISING OF ONIONS.
Onions raised this summer will cure all of next
winter’s colds, tone up the family health in general
and be an important and pleasing addition to the
food supply, so they should find good room in Every-
man’s Garden,
There are several “don’ts” that apply to this
vegetable. In the first place it is not a rugged gar-
den pioneer, ready to thrive, as corn or potatoes
would, on newly turned-under sod. For that reason
put the onion row where there was a hoed crop last
season. But do not put it where onions themselves
were for this is one of the vegetables that must have
rotation to save it from disease and insects.
Composition of the soil is not so important as its
mechanical condition. Sandy loam is best, but
onions may be raised profitably on heavy clay soil if
a lot of decayed leaves or barnyard manure is worked
into it to break it up and make it more porous. If
your garden happens to be a piece of old, reclaimed
112
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
swampland, where there is a muck soil, you can raise
onions there, too, after thorough cultivation and an
application of lime and potash.
Let the preparation of the ground be sufficient to
give a four-inch layer of well-pulverized earth, as
smooth and free of weeds and rubbish as if you were
preparing a seedbed for flowers. If this soil is well
supplied with humus substitute commercial fertilizer
for manure. Any mixture sold for potato fertiliza-
tion will do, but a combination specially adapted for
onions can be made at home for very little money.
Get half a pound of sulphate of ammonia, two
pounds of muriate of potash, four pounds of acid
phosphate, and a pound of cottonseed meal. Mix
them/well with a hoe and rake into the ground. Two
pounds of such a mixture would be ample for two
fifty-foot rows of onions.
It is simpler for the amateur to buy sets — a pint
of reds and a pint of whites make a good combination
and will be enough for two thirty-foot rows. The
sets cost about thirty cents a quart. Place them
three inches apart and there should be a foot between
rows.
If seed is used, an ounce, costing from twenty to
113
APRIL—THE SECOND WEEK
thirty cents, will be sufficient for one hundred feet of
planting. Cover the seed with half an inch of soil.
Sow thickly and thin out to three-inch spacing after
the plants have started.
114
CHAPTER XI
&
ER 2 AED a Pe De ee,
THERE are so many excellent reasons why the ama-
teur gardener should raise his own small fruits as
well as his vegetables that it would take too much of
his time from out-of-door work to read them all. He
had better read briefly how to raise the fruits — and
then get at it. So to save time the reasons may be
grouped as economic, gastronomic and esthetic.
As to the first, fruit costs more at the store than
vegetables, and it costs almost as little to raise.
Fresh fruit is not only a delightful but a most health-
ful thing for the family to eat in abundance. If it
has been raised in some other man’s garden there is
very little freshness about it after it has reached
your table by way of the commission man and the re-
tail dealer. And, esthetically, fruit is the one thing
needed to make Everyman’s Garden beautiful, to give
tone and colour to the vegetable patch, while the
115
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
growing of it is about as interesting a part of his
enterprise as Everyman can tackle.
Also,it is easier to keep the women of an average
family enthusiastic about the garden throughout the
season if there is fruit in it. It appeals to their love
of colour and their feminine weakness for desserts.
Many a daughter who would scorn to hoe the pota-
toes would like nothing better than to be caught with
a camera while picking rich red clusters of currants.
So much for the reasons for having a fruit garden.
Now for the facts. If possible select a part of your
garden that has a good loamy soil for the fruits. If
the soil is not right you can do a great deal to make
it so by plenty of cultivation and the digging in of
barnyard manure. The best way, practically the
only safe way, is to plant the fruits on ground that
has been used for at least one year for vegetables —
such crops as corn or potatoes or beans that have
been well hoed. ‘This assures the fruit of soil that
is rid of the annual weed seeds and the perennials,
such as the various kinds of grass, and that is also
comparatively free from insect larve. It also pro-
vides soil that is mellow from cultivation.
If you have your choice between a piece of ground
116
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
that is light and sandy and another that is heavier
because of the presence of clay, give the brambles —
that is, the various kinds of raspberries, the black-
berries and dewberries — the sandy place and put the
currants and gooseberries where the clay loam is, for
such is the ideal arrangement so far as soil character
is concerned. But that is a fme point which should
not cause any loss of sleep or time in getting ready to
set the fruit out. For the bush fruits will thrive in
almost any soil if they are set out properly and get
decent care thereafter. Lack of moisture is one of
the few things that bush fruits will not stand.
Neither will they stand an excess of moisture.
Standing water on the surface is fatal; so is a soggy,
wet soil down about the roots, so drainage is an im-
portant matter to look after. Fortunately it is a
very simple one, so don’t spoil what might otherwise
be a very good fruit patch by failure to dig a drain-
age ditch if it is needed. A short line of drain tile
may prove a good investment.
The more time and care devoted to the prepara-
tion of the soil now the better will be the fruit crop,
in quantity and quality, when the bushes come into
bearing. If you are very particular and very deter-
117
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
mined to have about the best fruit garden in your
neighbourhood you will resort to the extreme method
of trenching the ground to a depth of two feet.
That means digging a trench two feet deep at one
end of the fruit garden, taking the earth to the other
end, then digging another trench beside the first,
shoveling the earth into the first, digging a third and
putting the earth into the second, and so on away
across the patch selected for the fruits. The earth
that has been taken from the first trench at one end
finally goes into the last trench dug at the other end,
thus completing the process.
The result of all this is to give you a deeply jae
and thoroughly stirred soil in which the roots will
have the very best opportunity for growth. Of
course if you find a stratum of pure clay or sand a
foot or so down you will not bring it to the surface.
In that case shift the topsoil for as great a depth as
it is good and treat the subsoil by breaking it up and
working into it a lot of manure. For that matter
some manure of the well-rotted sort should be worked
into the whole bed, topsoil and all. The only excuses
for not using barnyard manure liberally in the prep-
aration of the soil is that the soil may be well sup-
118
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
plied with humus at the outset and that chemical
fertilizers are to be applied later as the more conven-
ient way of enriching the soil after the plants are
established.
It would be useless here to recommend particular
varieties of bush fruits. Selections should be made
with reference to the family’s likes, in accordance
with Everyman’s knowledge of what has done well in
the neighbourhood, and with the advice of the nearest
reliable nurseryman. Furthermore, names mean
much less as applied to bush fruits than they do in
the case of trees. There is, for example, a late-
fruiting variety of raspberry which an Eastern nur-
seryman has exploited of recent years under a very
hifalutin name at fruit shows and in catalogues and
for which he has charged a very stiff price. But
that very same fruit, under various commoner names,
is to be had from nurserymen throughout the country
at a much more reasonable price. So the best way
to order your plants is to describe to the dealer just
what you want and then trust to his honesty.
The dewberry is one of the brambles that may
have a place in the fruit garden, but go light on that.
It isn’t much of a fruit at best, is an uncertain pro-
9
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
duuer, bears a small fruit and a big thorn that makes
working about it rough and painful. Its only ad-
vantages are that it bears earlier fruit than the
blackberry bush and will grow on the poorest sort of
soil. One or two bushes, for the sake of the experi-
ment and to have the satisfaction of a full fruit list
in the garden, are about all that you should fuss
with. Put the plants three feet apart.
Blackberries require more room than anything else
in the bush fruit plantation. ‘They make the best
showing when planted in hills six feet apart each way,
but that requires more room than is available on the
small place without crowding out something else
equally good. Give each plant four feet, and if pos-
sible have them in rows six feet apart. Or they may
be planted in double rows one foot apart, six feet
between rows. They should be planted early in the
spring. Set the roots in the soil four inches deep
and cut the tops down to within a foot of the ground.
For the first year do not allow more than five new
canes to grow, and after that determine the number
solely by the character of the growth — that is, cut
out all that are not healthy and vigorous in appear-
ance. Get rid of the superfluous suckers as they
120
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
appear. Remove the old canes and cut back the
branches for half their growth each spring. The
plants should yield good crops for seven years or
more if they receive proper care.
For the raspberry follow the same methods as for
blackberries, except that the spacing should be three
feet between bushes and four feet between rows.
Currants and gooseberries may be considered to-
gether so far as their needs are concerned. Get two-
year-old plants, with plenty of good roots, and plant
them early in the season. Both these berries require
heavier, moister soil than the blackberries, a fact to
be remembered in planting the fruit garden if the
patch offers any variety of soil. Space the currants
and gooseberries the same as raspberries.
Prune in the fall or early the following spring,
taking out all the old branches and whatever new
ones do not look promising, and cut back any growth
that seems to shoot up too fast and get ahead of
the average development of the entire bush, for the
plant should be kept symmetrical. Cultivate with
great care near the plants, for the roots grow very
close to the surface, so the hoe, if used too vigorously,
will cut them off.
| 121
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
All these bush plants may be had at the rate of a
dollar a dozen or less.
Have the ground prepared before the plants are
delivered, either by the trenching method or by a
thorough spading, supplemented by a fining of the
surface’soil with the rake. Also have the holes dug
at proper intervals, big enough so that the roots
may be well spread out, without any twisting or
cramping.
If there must be some delay between the arrival
of the plants and their setting out see to it that they
are heeled into moist ground — that is, bury the
roots temporarily in a trench to prevent their dry-
ing out. This precaution will go a long way in the
starting of healthy plants. Another device that will
help in the same way is to dip the roots in water
or, better still, in thin mud before planting. This
will assure good moisture at the start and hasten
the process of becoming well rooted in the new
ground. Cut the bushes back at planting time, and
before cold weather sets in cover the ground with a
heavy mulch of straw or manure to prevent the heav-
ing of the soil and plants by alternating thawing
and freezing.
122
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
Through the summer watch the leaves of the cur-
rant bushes. If they blister and shrivel up and turn
red look on the under sides and you will probably
find a lot of green lice. Dissolve a pound of whale-
oil soap in five gallons of water and spray the foliage,
being sure to get the mixture on the under side of
the leaves where the lice are. Another remedy for
currants is spraying with a strong solution of to-
bacco extract.
The midge and the gooseberry fruit worm attack
gooseberries, causing them to drop from the vines.
Spray the bushes, as soon as the fruit begins to en-
large, with Bordeaux mixture or the summer dilution
of lime-sulphur — that is, one to thirty — with half
a pound of arsenate of lead dissolved in every fifteen
gallons,
Examine the raspberry canes very carefully
through June and July to guard against the cane
borers. Cut off all damaged or withered tips below
the point of trouble. Above that point there is
probably a borer inside. It is in June that the
beetles girdle the canes, making two rings about an
inch apart, between which they lay the eggs that
produce the borers.
123
“
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
That is about all there is to the process of start-
ing the plantation of bush fruits; but remember that
you have got something that will become nothing
more than a thorny nuisance and waste of ground if
you do not take care of it in the seasons to come. It
will require cultivating and fertilizing and irrigating
just as much as the vegetable garden, and when the
proper time comes the puzzling question of pruning
will have to be tackled. |
By the term “ small fruits? is meant the bush or
vine growing berries — blackberries, raspberries,
currants and gooseberries. The strawberry bed is
considered separately in chapter nine. Tech-
nically grapes are not included in this classification,
but Everyman surely should include them in his gar-
den and directions for starting the vines are in
chapter twenty-seven.
Here are chemical fertilizing formulas of trifling
cost, easy to obtain and mix, for the bush fruit gar-
deri. They are figured for a patch twenty feet
square. A little arithmetic will enable the amateur
gardener to get the proportionate quantity for larger
or smaller areas:
Currants and GooseBeRRIES—One pound of nitrate of
124
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
soda, two pounds of bone meal, a pound and a half of muriate
of potash.
BuiackpBerries — A pound and a half of nitrate of soda, four
pounds and a half of bone meal, a pound of muriate of potash.
Raspserries — One pound of nitrate of soda, six pounds of
bone meal, two pounds of muriate of potash.
125
CHAPTER XxX 1
£
A RE Ne EE Ee DR ee IG
CONTINUED
Axovr this time of year a tree agent will rap at your
front door and urge you to buy fruit trees. The
probability is that he is honest, believes what he
tells you about the excellence of his wares, and is
trying to make a living. But be firm and send him
away without an order, or if he overcomes your judg-
ment give him a small order and when the trees come
cut off the roots and use the tops as brush for your
pea vines. Don’t set them out for fruit-bearing
purposes in the years to come.
When rid of the agent go to the nearest nursery-
man who has been established in the business a long
time and buy your trees direct of him, after telling
him just what you want and getting his personal
assurance that what he sells you is true to name or
type, that it is free from disease, and that it comes
from good-bearing stock.
126
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
It helps to do this even if you are an amateur and
obliged to depend upon the word of the grower. It
is not so much a question of the honesty of the nur-
seryman as of his interest. The honesty can be
taken for granted, but he will use more care in se-
lecting for you after a personal talk, and this method
is surely worth the time and the carfare you put
into it. As for the cost, the price you will pay for
a single tree or by the dozen is much less than what
you would have to pay the travelling agent, who fre-
quently knows nothing about trees.
Remember that in setting out fruit trees you are
embarking upon a venture that will last for years.
It is much more serious than planting a row of corn
——hence the necessity for Everyman’s starting
right on his miniature orchard of one or a dozen
trees.
It is taken for granted that he will in the course
of his gardening pass through the small-fruit stage,
and after establishing his berry patch will begin to
think of trees. He ought to anyway.
If he has plenty of room the standard trees will
do. If space is limited there are the dwarf trees,
taking up very little room, bearing much sooner
127
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
than big trees, and yielding, in some cases, a better
quality, though the same variety of fruit that the
standards bear.
So far as apples and pears are concerned it is
safe to say that the dwarf trees will better meet the
requirements of Everyman and his suburban prop-
erty than the big ones. But he may have the Bald-
win or the Northern Spy or any other variety that
he may desire just the same. A dwarf fruit tree is
simply one that has been made up by the combina-
tion of a scion from a tree bearing the sort of fruit
desired and a root of some slower-growing tree.
For instance the nurseryman gets his dwarf pears
by taking a scion from an ordinary or standard pear
tree — Bartlett or any other variety — and graft-
ing it on a quince root. The union between the two
is perfect. The slow-growing quince root will never _
allow the pear top to reach regular pear-tree size,
but the fruit will be of the same size and always true
to type.
The dwarf apple, for the purposes of the commer-
cial nurseryman, is obtained as a rule by grafting
the various scions of standard trees on the roots of
the Paradise apple.
128
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
One great advantage of the dwarf apple tree to
Everyman, who may want to be a real farmer and
move to a bigger place eight or ten years from now,
is that it will bear in two or three years, whereas
fruit cannot be expected from a standard apple tree
inside of seven years. ‘This material shortening of
the waiting period applies to all dwarfed trees.
Stunted peach trees, only waist high, that look
more like bushes than trees, and bear wonderful fruit,
are obtained by grafting on plum roots. An even
more diminutive peach tree 1s had by using the root
of the dwarf sand cherry. This dwarf sand cherry
is also the root used in making vest-pocket plum
trees.
Dwarf pears of nearly all the popular varieties
can be bought of any first-class nursery for twenty
or twenty-five cents each, with material reduction
on lots of ten or more trees. The same nurseryman
probably will sell you dwarf apples at twenty-five
cents a tree.
These two — apple and pear — are the only fruits
that the American nurserymen have so far made
a business of dwarfing. To get the peaches and
plums in the stunted form requires something of a
129
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
hunt or a little experimental work with grafting on
your own account.
Among the obvious advantages of this dwarf fruit
is the ease in getting at all parts of the trees, with-
out the aid of poles or ladders, to prune and spray
and pick the fruit. Furthermore the trees may be
shaped and trained almost as readily as a grape-
vine or a wistaria. Pears and peaches can be made
to grow against a wall or trellis at the end of the
garden. Dwarf apples, kept down to single stems
or cordons and allowed to go straight up or bent
into horizontal growth, can be converted into a per-
fect fruit-bearing screen. Apple trees grown in
this fashion may be set as close as two feet apart.
Apples allowed to take bush form will thrive with
only seven-foot intervals. And the same is true of |
all the other dwarf fruit. So no matter how small
his space Everyman may have some sort of an
orchard.
As to soil requirements, the need of careful culti-
vation and pruning, and the absolute necessity for
spraying, the rules for the dwarf fruit plantation
are practically the same as for the orchard of big
trees.
130
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
Perhaps you own the place, have lots of room,
expect to live on it all your life and leave it to your
children, and have an old-fashioned notion that an
apple tree should be big enough to hang a swing
from and that fruit tastes better and more natural
if you have to climb for it. In that case two or
three different varieties of apple trees, standard size,
a pear, a cherry, a plum and a quince, and three
or four peach trees, early, medium and late varieties,
are what you want. Standard trees live longer than
the dwarfs.
The most’ successful orchards are those grown on
former forest land. That is not so hopeless a state-
ment for Everyman as it sounds at’first, inasmuch
as many a suburban place is on the site of what was
timber land a generation ago.
But to be more specific, the peach does best on
sandy loam, the pear and apple prefer a clay loam,
and the plum wili grow in heavier soil than any of
the other fruit trees. Nevertheless all these fruits
will thrive, especially in small, well-cherished family
orchards, on any reasonably good soil, so the naming
of the ideal conditions need not deter Everyman
whose place does not quite measure up to them,
131
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
One old-fashioned notion that must be discarded
at the outset is that fruit trees will take care of
themselves when once stuck into the ground, that an
orchard needs no cultivation, and that for some queer
reason the land selected for fruit growing may be
expected to produce its crop and a crop of grass
or weeds or vegetables at the same time. That is
all wrong, but it is the one fallacy — next to the one
that hens need only corn — that the average farmer
is most persistent in sticking to.
Prepare the ground in the first place as carefully
as you would that of the vegetable garden, only
plow or spade deeper. Cultivate the young orchard
until the middle of August and then sow crimson
clover in it, to be ploughed under next April. This
is to stock the soil with humus or rotting vegetable
matter and to furnish an ample supply of nitrogen
for the wood growth without paying the price of
expensive commercial nitrates. For the rest of the
fertilizing use manure and wood ashes or some other
supply of potash. Without potash there can be no
fruit.
If there is any difference in the lay of the land
give the apple trees the coldest, most exposed posi-
132
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
tions and the peaches the warmest and most sheltered.
Apple trees— we are not talking about the
dwarfs now — should be twenty feet apart. The
rule for a commercial orchard is forty feet, but in
the back-yard plantation, where there will be plenty
of individual care for each tree, closer planting may
be allowed and the trees can be pruned so they will
not interfere with one another. The peaches should
have at least twelve feet, as against the fifteen or
eighteen of big plantations.
At the nursery get one-year-old trees, true to
name and of good shape and size. Have the ground
prepared and the holes dug before the trees arrive
so there will be no delay during which the roots can
dry out. If it is not possible to plant as soon as
they come lay them in a trench and cover the roots
with moist earth.
Pruning is a problem that lasts all through the
life of a fruit tree, but it is never more important
than when the trees first arrive from the nursery.
In digging them out of the nursery rows some of
the larger roots have been broken and many of the
fine feeding roots and rootlets have been torn. This
is inevitable, but it does no harm if the knife is used
133
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
skillfully. There has been no corresponding damage
to the top part of the tree in the digging at the
nursery, so, as received by Everyman, the tree is
out of balance — too much branch to be supported
properly by the remaining root system at the be-
ginning of growth in his orchard. So the main stem
of the tree must be cut down—to two feet for
peaches and plums; to three feet for pears and
apples. Furthermore the side branches must be
trimmed off — cut off entirely on the new peach
trees and to within a few inches of the main stem on
apples and pears.
This cutting back of the main stem is not only
to relieve the roots of too much strain, but also for
the all-important forming of the head of the tree
and determining its future form. The lower that
head is formed, the easier it is going to be later
on to gather fruit, to spray and to prune the tree.
Also the tree is going to save itself by its own shade
from the dangers of sun scald, and it is going
to be better prepared to stand up against heavy
winds.
Do not leave more than four side branches; three
are better. They should grow, of course, in differ-
134
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
ent directions and should not start from the same
level on the main stem. If they do the danger of
splitting off under pressure of wind or the weight
of a big fruit crop is greatly increased.
The roots must be pruned too, to the extent of
cutting off all broken or torn ends. Then see to
it that the roots left are well spread out in the hole.
Hold the tree upright as well-pulverized earth is
shovelled back into the hole and joggle it up and
down so that the soil will fill in all the cavities and
crevices about the roots and rootlets. There must
be no air spaces left. As each tree is thus set, firm
the soil about it with your foot, just as you would
firm the earth above a row of garden seed, and then
scatter over the top a handful of loose soil to form
an earth mulch to keep the moisture underground
about the roots where it belongs.
Pruning and spraying — two very essential oper-
ations in the successful growing of tree fruits — are
usually associated with the idea of cold weather, as
the work is best done in the dormant season. That
is true enough of the heavy pruning and reforming
of trees and of the spraying for scale, which unfor-
tunately is the only spraying many fruit growers
135
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
seem to think is necessary. But much effective work
can be done in June with both knife and pump.
For the knife, however, substitute the thumb for
the greater part of the cleaning on small fruit trees.
Simply rub off the new leaf or tender sprout as soon
as it shows on trunk or branch at a point where new
growth is not wanted. A minute or two of thumb
pruning on each young fruit tree now and then in
the summer effects two great economies — it saves
hours of heavy pruning with knife or shears next
year when the sprout has developed into a branch
or twig that is not wanted and, what is more to the
point so far as the welfare and future productivity
of the tree are concerned, this getting rid of un-
necessary growth at its very start saves energy and
plant food to go into the development of the wood,
foliage and fruit that are wanted. For example,
the so-called suckers that grow on neglected fruit
trees, sapping their strength and yielding no return,
would never come if the summer pruning was as thor-
ough as it should be.
This applies particularly to the apple and er
trees. It is seldom the custom to prune cherries or
plums in summer and they require very little cutting
136
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
in winter; but pears are apt to throw out suckers
that should be cut off.
With the peaches and apples the thing may be
overdone. On trees set out this spring it is better,
perhaps, to eliminate the summer pruning altogether,
provided the trees were properly cut back and
trimmed when they were set out. The young trees
need about all the foliage they can produce to sup-
plement the work of the new root system in giving
the whole plant a good, first-year start. But here
again the amateur, wrestling with his first fruit-
tree problem, must use some judgment. Suppose,
for example, the new tree is making good growth in
leaf and new wood at the top and a branch starts
out from the trunk at the ground, as frequently
happens. It is obvious that that branch should be
cut off, because it will simply be a nuisance later on.
At the end of the first year’s growth take a two-
foot rule and measure all the new twigs on your
young peach tree. If they total up three hundred
or four hundred inches there has been good, healthy
development, indicative of proper care and fertiliza-
tion and correct soil conditions. In the second year
thumb pruning may be freely indulged in, and much
137
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
done by it toward shaping the tree as it should grow
— opened up enough inside to let the sunlight reach
all the fruit to colour it, not too high for conven-
ience and thoroughness in spraying and for ease in
picking, and without horizontal branches so low or
far-reaching as to interfere with thorough cultiva-
tion close to the tree. These suggestions apply to
the small fruit plantation as well as to the large
commercial orchard.
Winter spraying of fruit trees, as already said,
is primarily for the San Jose scale, although it helps
the general health of the trees. It should be done
with lime-sulphur in the proportion of one to nine
— that is, in every ten quarts of the applied mixture
there should be nine quarts of water and one quart
of the lme-sulphur.
Then comes the blossom spraying to get rid of
the curculio. This should be with a solution of
arsenate of lead in water, in the proportion of a
pound of the lead paste to sixty quarts of water.
Apply this to peach and apple trees when the petals
are falling.
Aphids or plant lice are best controlled by a spray
of kerosene emulsion—a useful thing to use for
138
eo
APRIL—_ TEAE THIRD, WEEK
various troubles of fruit trees, including the pear
tree psylla in June. You can make this for your-
self very easily. Take half a pound of fish-oil soap
— formerly known as whale oil — and dissolve it in
a gallon of water. Then put it with two gallons of
kerosene. Ordinary stirring with a stick will not
cause a sufficiently thorough and even mixture, but
this difficulty is overcome by pumping in a lot of air
and churning the soap water and kerosene together.
Take an ordinary bicycle pump and put the end of
the pipe into the liquid.
Scab and brown rot, which attack plums, apples
and peaches, can be controlled by summer spraying
with Bordeaux mixture or the kerosene emulsion.
Brown rot also attacks the cherry and this tree should
receive the same treatment.
A beetle, light brown in colour and about a quar-
ter of an inch long, called the quince curculio, at-
tacks the fruit for which it is named. It punctures
the fruit, making it knotty and wormy. Spread a
sheet on the ground under the tree and then shake
the tree. Many of the bugs will fall on to the sheet
so they can be gathered up and destroyed. The
spray remedy for this quince-tree trouble is Bordeaux
139
APRIL PR ETA Di Wie
or arsenate of lead, the same proportions as given
above for peach and apple, used after the fruit is set.
For leaf spot and fruit rot of plums spray with
Bordeaux, not only when the blossoms fall but again
when the fruit is about two-thirds grown. Even
then there is bound to be some spoiling of the fruit,
especially in a season of much muggy weather, be-
cause the plum is the most difficult of all the tree
fruits to pull through in good condition.
For tree fruits dig the following fertilizer mix-
tures into the soil within a radius of four or five feet
about the trees:
For apples, pears and quinces—one pound of
nitrate of soda, seven pounds of bonemeal, two
pounds of muriate of potash.
For cherries and plums — half a pound of nitrate
of soda, five pounds of bonemeal, one pound of
muriate of potash.
For peaches — one pound of nitrate of soda, four
pounds of bonemeal, two pounds of muriate of pot-
ash.
Take a look at the map of the United States and
see where your garden is with reference to latitude.
If you are south of the thirty-sixth parallel the pos-
140
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEK
sibilities of your fruit plantation are greater than
those of your brother gardener farther north. You
can amuse yourself by trying unusual fruits, There
is the pawpaw for instance. It is a low-growing tree
of beautiful foliage, has large purple-and-white flow-
ers and bears a very aromatic fruit, which you do
not like at first but take to later on. This fruit
thrives best in rich, moist soil. It has to be propa-
gated from seed, as any other method is uncertain.
Juice of both fruit and leaves makes a fine sauce that
is much relished when used with meats. |
The loquat will grow down South, too, all through
the Gulf States. It is a tree that ordinarily attains
a height of about ten feet, blooms anywhere from
August to December and matures its clusters of
yellow, pear-shaped and very acid fruits in the
spring.
Persimmons may be made to grow in the open
as far north as the thirty-eighth degree of latitude.
Plant the seeds in the fall just as you would plant
a peach pit, and transplant the young trees the fol-
lowing fall. The persimmon requires a warm soil
of good loam.
The pomegranate, not hardy north of the thirty-
14]
APRIL—THE THIRD WEEE.
fourth parallel, may be propagated from hard-wood
cuttings placed in the open ground in February or
from new wood cut and planted out in the summer.
This tree will do as well in a hedge as growing by
itself, and thus serve the double purpose of decora-
tion and fruit producing.
CH APP hee Bee
®
APRIL—THE FOURTH WEEK
Farture to make lettuce head up is one of the most
frequent causes of disappointment in the small gar-
den. Selection of the right variety and the observ-
ance of one or two very simple principles of vegetable
growth will overcome the difficulty. There are
numerous varieties that will form compact, cabbage-
like heads and have white, crisp hearts under proper
conditions.
Every seed grower and experimenter in plant
propagation is at work on the problem all the time to
get new sorts. Sometimes they will advertise them
and boom them too soon, before the habit of the va-
riety is so firmly established by several generations of
even performance that even the amateur cannot fail.
So it is much better for that amateur, especially in the
matter of lettuce, to stick to a standard variety,
something that all the seedsmen put well toward the
143
APRIL—THE FOURTH WEEK
top of their list and, when you pin them down to it,
recommend with even more assurance than their own
pet specialties.
One such standard is Big Boston, a lettuce variety
that can be recommended by any disinterested guide
to the amateur because all seed stores have it. It
is the one variety that the writer has never failed to
head in several different kinds of soil. It is the let-
tuce that the United States Government, through the
Department of Agriculture, talks about as the surest
sort to form a close head. Furthermore it is the best
to raise from seed planted in the open ground, the
custom of most amateurs, without the aid of glass or
transplanting from a preliminary seedbed.
So if you failed last season try Big Boston this.
With the right sort planted, the next thing to bear
in mind is that lettuce to be well grown and to make
good eating in the salad must be quickly grown. It
should be ready for the table in eight or nine weeks.
That means plenty of moisture and an abundance
of plant food and good cultivation very frequently.
Supply the initial store of plant food by spading a
liberal amount of black barnyard manure into the
ground before planting. If the soil thus enriched is
144
APRIL—THE FOURTH WEEK
sandy loam you have the ideal combination, but other
kinds of soil will do.
Pulverize the ground thoroughly with the spade
and then the rake and finally a smoothing board be-
fore planting the seed. If the bed is to be small,
and you just want to lay yourself out to produce the
best possible lettuce, put an inch or two of the sur-
face soil through a fine screen. Have the rows a
foot apart and mark them for the planting with the
point of a stick so lightly that the depression will be
hardly noticeable. Drop the seed in an even line in
this shallow drill and barely cover. The first leaves
should show within a week. At the end of the second
week thin out to about four-inch intervals. As soon
as it is possible to determine which are the best plants
thin again to one foot intervals so that the remaining
heads will have plenty of room and plenty of food.
After the lettuce is well started the growth may be
quickened and a crisper, more tender crop obtained
by supplementing the manure already dug into the
ground by a little of nitrate of soda. A couple of
ounces sprinkled along a twenty-foot row of plants
and lightly raked in, or the same amount put in a
gallon of water used for sprinkling the ground be-
145
APRIL—THE FOURTH WEEK
side the plants after sunset will do much good: in
forcing development. Similar results may be ob-
tained, though not quite so quickly, by scattering
a shovelful of hen manure along the row, close to the
plants but not touching them. Rake this in. The
nitrate or hen manure is nitrogen feed and lettuce
is one of the few things with which this particular
form of fertilizing is not so apt to be overdone.
Nitrogen makes wood in trees and foliage in plants,
rather than fruit, and as the leaf is the only part of
the lettuce that is wanted the more of it the better.
With peas or beans, on the other hand, too much
nitrogen would give very luxuriant growth of deep
green leaves and very few pods. A
Frequent cultivation of the lettuce is very neces-
sary, not only to keep the weeds out but to save the
moisture for the roots just below the surface.
Lettuce is a cold-weather plant at its best, but
with proper care may be grown in succession through-
out the season. Muslin screens placed above the
plants in the heat of the day during the hottest part
of the season will help a great deal. An incident of
a recent winter’s remarkably mild weather and an
indication of the hardiness of lettuce was the growth
146
APRIL—THE FOURTH WEEK
of this plant in the writer’s open garden in middle
Jersey as late as the end of January. This, of
course, was accidental. Plants which had seeded
themselves from the late fall crop had come up and
survived what little cold there was so well that they
were transferred from open ground to a cold-frame.
Another convenient thing about lettuce is that it
fits so well into a companion cropping plan. Such
a scheme is the planting of several different veg-
etables at the same time on the same patch of ground,
the arrangement being to select things that require
short, medium and long periods for coming to ma-
turity. All sorts of combinations are possible in this
companion cropping, by which ground space is saved
and the same cultivating is made to serve for more
than one crop. Here is just one for a sample:
Plant early cabbage and lettuce in a row with ten
inches between plants, and the two kinds alternating.
Ten inches from the first row plant a row of rad-
ishes, ten inches beyond that another of ‘alternating
lettuce and early cabbage plants, and so on till the
ground available for the combination patch is occu-
pied. The radishes will mature and be out of the
way before they can become a drain on the other
147
APRIL—THE FOURTH WEEK
things and the lettuce will be out of the way next,
leaving the cabbages in sole possession of the patch
when they are maturing.
This same thing is done by orchardists on a large
scale when they set their new apple trees forty fect
apart and set peaches between. By the time the
apple trees need all of the land the peach trees have
finished their work and can be pulled out. There
is no reason in the world why Everyman should not
do the same thing in his garden.
Lettuce is almost immune to insect pests or dis-
ease. About the only thing that ever attacks it is
the plant louse. You can get rid of that very easily
by dusting the plants with tobacco powder. Use a
powder sprayer or bellows.
Human beings have been eating cabbage, to the
advantage of their health, for at least four thousand
years. Everyman should keep up the record for his
own family by having a patch in his garden. Near
by there should be some of the allied plant, the cauli-
flower. These things are very similar in their re-
quirements and so near alike in their make-up that
somebody once described a cauliflower as a cabbage
that had had a college education. To start in April
148
APRIL—THE FOURTH WEEK
_ to get early cabbage or cauliflower it is necessary to
buy plants started under glass in February. For
next winter’s supply of late cabbage the seed may be
sown in the open ground at any time through May
or June throughout that wide belt of the United
States which may be roughly described as within the
latitude of New York or Philadelphia. About the
first “don’t ” for the amateur to observe in select-
ing the place for his cabbage is don’t put it where
cabbage was last year. It is subject to more veg-
etable ills than you can shake a stick at, and the
germs of these diseases linger in the ground from
one season to the next and may ruin this year’s crop
even if the trouble was not in evidence last season.
Sour soil — that is, soil with too much acid in it —
is very sure to make trouble, especially by bringing
about the club root, the worst of the cabbage diseases.
First see if the soil is sour by squeezing a piece
of blue litmus paper in a moistened lump of earth.
If it turns red the acid is there. Work a pound of
lime into every twenty-foot row of the garden.
To avoid black rot it is well to soak the seed for
fifteen minutes in a solution of formalin just before
planting. An ounce of formalin in a gallon of water
149
APRIL—THE FOURTH WEEK
is the right proportion. Insect pests that prey
upon cabbage plants may be controlled by spraying —
with kerosene emulsion.
For fertilizer for cabbage and cauliflower there is
nothing better than old barnyard manure. You can
hardly have too much of it. If it can be ploughed
and spaded under some time before the seeds are
planted or the plants are set out so much the better,
for it should be thoroughly worked in, and both the
soil and the manure should be made fine by frequent
tillage so that the plant-food ingredients of the
manure will be available for the roots from the be-
ginning of growth. It is a good thing to supple |
ment the manure with a few cents’ worth of chem-
icals. For the early cabbage use nitrate of soda
for the same reason that you use it on lettuce — to
quicken leaf growth. :
Cabbage and cauliflower rows should be at least
twenty inches apart, even in a small and crowded gar-
den where the ground area does not match the ambi-
tion of the amateur. Two feet is a better distance.
Plants in the row should be the same distance apart
as the rows, and late varieties need more room than
the early ones. 3
150
CHAPTER XIV
2
MAY-——THE FIRST HALF
Ir all the water needed to bring a good crop of corn
to maturity on a certain field could be collected and
held on the surface of that field it would make a
pond eight inches deep. This applies to your own
small patch of sweet corn as well as to the farmers’
fields of many acres in the Corn Belt. The fact was
demonstrated at the Illinois Agricultural Experiment
Station to convince corn growers that their crop
needs a great deal of moisture.
In spite of this, one grower in Pennsylvania, who
has such a record of corn successes that they are a
matter of official comment by the Government, raised
one of his good crops in a year when there was no
rainfall between planting time and harvest.
These statements may seem contradictory to the
amateur gardener who wants to raise some sweet corn
for his own table, but they are not. They prove
151
MAY THE PIRS TA
first that the corn must have moisture, and second
that if it doesn’t come from the sky direct it must
be, and what is more important, can be furnished in
another way. ‘The Pennsylvania farmer got his good
crop in the dry year by much cultivation, working
constantly to conserve what little moisture there was
in the ground and to keep it down near the roots
where it would serve the purposes of the plant.
That is the lesson for the amateur. He must hoe.
The hotter and dryer it is the more he must hoe, for
heat makes corn grow so fast that you almost can see
it, and that steadily increasing height of stalk puts a
tremendous strain on the root system, which must
have its water supply if the cobs are to be well filled
out with big, juicy kernels. :
Also the roots must have an ample food supply
if they are to furnish a food supply for the garden-
er’s table through July and August and September.
Of the plant-food elements needed by all vegetables
the two that figure most prominently, perhaps, in
the case of corn are potash and nitrogen. Both
these can be bought of the seedsman, together with
the needed phosphoric acid in the shape of some
commercial fertilizer that is specially adapted to
152
MAY—THE FIRST HALF
corn. The nitrogen is supplied in this case by ni-
trate of soda, which is the most expensive of all the
agricultural chemicals. If you keep hens by all
means use some of the manure from the poultry yard
for the corn patch. It is the richest fertilizer there
is so far as nitrogen is concerned, Pulverize it, mix
it well with fresh soil, and work it into the hill or
drill where the corn is to be planted.
Fresh hen manure unmixed with earth must not
come in direct contact with the seed or the roots of
the corn plant, because it is so rich that it would
destroy them. Barnyard manure is the best all-
round fertilizer for corn, as for everything else, if
it is entirely free from the germs of diseases that
attack corn. It is dangerous in that respect, so if
your corn-patch soil is well supplied with humus —
that is, decayed vegetable matter, old sods and the
like — it does not need the breaking up process that
comes from digging in a lot of coarse manure, and
it is best to use the chemical fertilizer from the store
or supply the ingredients in part with the droppings
from the henhouse. Wood ashes form an adequate
home supply of the potash.
Twenty-five pounds of commercial chemical fer-
153
MAY—TAE FIRST TALLY
tilizer on a patch twenty by thirty feet — six hun-
dred square feet — is a generous supply, and if that
amount is reduced or increased in proportion to the
size of the area devoted to corn the crop will not fail
from lack of plant food.
Newly spaded or ploughed-under sod makes the
ideal plat for the corn, especially if the earth is sandy
loam. ‘The second choice, if you have no new ground
left in the garden area, is the patch where peas or
beans were last year. On the other hand, the loca-
tion of the corn must be considered with reference
to the rest of the vegetables. The northern end of
the garden is best, so the shade from the tall stalks
will not dwarf the other plants that must have their
share of the sunlight.
Cross breeding by the falling of the pollen from
one variety of corn on the silk of another variety ~
should also be taken into account. If you plant
the seed of a Baldwin apple or any other variety, or
the seed of a particular sort of peach, there is no
telling what sort of fruit you will get from the re-
sulting trees. The same is true of corn. No mat-
ter how carefully selected the seed may be, it will not
reproduce its own variety throughout the crop if
154
MAY—THE FIRST HALF
i
another kind of corn is too close. The resulting
crop may be just as edible — perhaps more so if the
varieties that cross are both sugar corn. But don’t
make the mistake of trying to raise a little chicken
corn for your own poultry in the same garden with
the sweet corn. If you do that you may have to
feed the whole crop to the hens.
The ease with which corn pollen is blown from
one stalk to the silk of another makes this plant one
of the few with which the amateur may experiment
in crossing and get results that are worth while. It
will add greatly to his interest in his garden as some-
thing more than a source of food and a place for
healthy exercise. He should at least do something
in the way of producing his own corn seed for the
following year. Watch the development of the dif-
ferent stalks, the time of tasseling, the amount of
pollen and the quantity and quality of the silk.
Then mark the plants which show the best growth
in every respect and leave on them the perfect ears
to ripen for seed purposes. Hang them from the
ceiling of a dry room where the mice cannot reach
them. Half a dozen good ears will furnish all the
seed required for the ordinary family garden.
155
MAY—THE FIRST HAL?
Soil preparation must be thorough. Tillage
should consist not only of turning over the seedbed
with plough or spade, but also of pulverizing the new
surface with the rake or harrow. This is to con-
serve the moisture by the means already referred to
and to break soil lumps into small particles from
which it is easier for the plants to draw their food
supply.
Planting in hills or drills is largely a matter of
fancy, although each way has its enthusiastic advo-
cates who will not admit there is any merit whatever
in the other. This is one of the things each amateur
should decide for himself after trying both methods,
one this year and the other next. Then he will j oin
the hill crowd or the drill crowd and be a trifle cranky
about the matter ever afterward. But that is part
of the fun of gardening — breaking away from the
books and having real opinions of your own.
Distance apart of the plants in drill or row and
the distance apart of the hills should be determined
in part by the variety of the corn. Seed of the early,
low-growing varieties may be put as close as eight
inches in the drill, with thirty inches between rows.
Hills for the same sort of corn should be two feet
156
MAY—THE FIRST HALF
and a half apart with the same distance between rows.
For the main or late-crop, tall-growing varieties
increase all these intervals. Let the plants in a row
be ten inches or a foot apart, with three feet between
drills, and let the hills be three feet apart each way
—four is better if you have the room. For the
row planting the distance suggestions are for the
plants allowed to grow. It is well to plant thicker
than that at the outset, as a precaution against the
toll taken by birds or cutworms and plants lost in
other ways, and then thin out if too many of the
plants survive.
For the same safeguarding purposes plant five
kernels in each hill and then thin out to three plants.
Many gardeners try to raise four stalks in each hill
and get fairly good results, but the experience of
the writer in his own garden is in favour of three
plants to a hill for the best returns in quality and
quantity. ‘To carry out the suggestion to save your
own seed it is not a bad plan to have some hills with
only two plants each, so that the corn saved for re-
production may have the very best chance for com-
plete development. Plant the seed about an inch
deep.
157
MAY—THE FIRST HALF
Tillage before planting must be supplemented by |
frequent cultivation afterward to keep the weeds out
and to have at all times an earth mulch of loose, dry
soil on the surface to cut off the evaporation of
moisture from below. In the small corn patch this
mulch is best obtained by the use of the hoe, which
cuts out the weed growth at the same time better
than a rake can. Be careful, however, not to cut
off a root, for when a corn plant loses a root it im-
mediately sets to work to grow a new one and that
means so much energy diverted from the business of
sending up the stalk and producing the ear.
Succession in the corn crop may be obtained by
planting early, medium and late varieties at the
same time, or by making successive plantings of the
same early variety at one-week intervals. The ad-
vantage of the first method lies in the fact that the
best corn — that is, the juiciest, on the largest ears
— is of the late varieties such as Stowell’s Evergreen
and Country Gentleman.
BUSH AND POLE BEANS.
String beans, the ordinary six-weeks bush variety,
are the real benefactors of Everyman and his gar-
158
MAY—THE FIRST HALF
den. They will grow almost anywhere; they will
make poor soil better by merely growing in it, be-
cause they take nitrogen from the air and add it to
the reserve supply in the earth. ‘They are prolific,
can be had in unbroken succession from early sum-
mer to frost-time — a movable date — and there are
few things that ever interfere with the crop in the
way of pests or diseases.
Nevertheless the bean is worthy of Everyman’s
best care and its easy-going qualities do not mean
that the seed should simply be thrown on the ground
and left to take a chance. Plant the ordinary string
beans early in May, unless your garden is so far
north or so far down east in New England. that you
are in danger of frosts after the middle of May.
Planting of the limas may be postponed until the
end of the month as an extra precaution.
Although, as just admitted, beans will grow almost
anywhere, a sandy loam is best. A light sandy soil
is best for the limas. Pulverize the ground well be-
fore planting and be generous with the barnyard
manure. Do not use hen manure unless you want
to raise luxuriant bean vines with no beans on them
to speak of.
159
MAY—THE FIRST HALF
Make the drills for the seed two inches deep and
drop the seed two inches apart. The plants will
grow and do well as close as that, but better results
will be had from thinning out to four inches after
the second week of growth. Use the ground spar-
ingly for the first planting. Plant a second lot two
weeks later and so on until the end of August or
later. One row thirty feet long is enough to plant
at a time for a family of four persons.
For the pole limas plant in hills at least two and
a half feet apart — three feet if you have plenty of
room. Plant five seeds to a hill, two inches deep and
with the eyes up. After you are sure three of the
plants are going to survive pull out the other two.
Use poles with the bark on, as the rough surface
_ gives the tendrils of the plant a better clinging and
climbing chance. Cedar poles are best.
In preparing the hills it is an excellent thing to
remove a shovelful of earth, throw in a shovelful of
manure, cover it with two inches of earth, plant the
seed, and cover with two inches more. The seed
should not come in contact with the manure, but it
means good growth to have that supply buried there.
160
CHAPTER XV,
&
MA YT HE S. 2B. CON DD. BAL FS
No time will be saved by trying to rush the season
of planting melon seed in the open ground. Not
only must the danger of frost be entirely gone, but
the soil must have had time to warm up before re-
ceiving the seed.
Starting melons under glass is almost never tried
by the amateur. It is not suggested to him in his
seed catalogues and the seedsmen do not start and
sell the plants as they do tomatoes. Nevertheless
this method for getting an early crop is resorted to
by commercial growers in many parts of the country
where the season is short, and is, of course, the reg-
ular practice in Canada where the bulk of the famous
Montreal melon crop is raised for the market. So
there is no reason why Everyman in his small garden
should not take a hint from the professional grower
161
MAY—THE SECOND HALF
to prolong the fruiting period of one of the most de-_
lightful things he can possibly raise for his table.
It is safe to begin melon planting out-of-doors by
the middle of May as far north as latitude 41, ex-
cept in regions where, because of altitude or other
peculiar local condition, there is risk of later frosts.
But if Everyman happens to have his garden up near
the northern edge of the country let him start his
seed in a cold-frame or protect the hills in the open
garden with glass boxes.
The boxes can be bought at an implement store, or
they can be made easily by the gardener himself.
A wooden box a foot and a half square and ten or
twelve inches deep, such as the grocer will give you
or sell for a nickel, will do for the frame. Knock
out the bottom and one side and substitute window-
glass. Then place the converted frame with the glass |
top over the space where the melon seed are planted,
with the glass side towards the south. It is better
to arrange the overhead glass so it can_be slipped
back and forth a few inches to allow an opening for ©
ventilation in the middle of the day. This contriv-
ance will enable the amateur who uses it to get a
start of three weeks or more on his neighbour’s mel-
162
MAY THE. SHCOND HALE
ons. It costs very little and the boxes may be used
season after season and for many purposes other than
that of giving early warmth to the melon patch.
If the seeds are planted in a cold-frame or else-
where under glass except under the boxes in the gar-
den where they are to remain permanently, they may
be put in a month before the outdoor season begins.
Before transplanting wet the soil well so it will
cling to the roots and then dig up each plant with ~
as much soil as possible and transfer quickly to the
prepared hill.
Sandy soil, with an abundance of humus in it, is
best for the cantaloupe. But if Everyman’s Garden
is not blessed with that variety of earth he need not
forego the satisfaction of having a melon patch. The
plant will grow in any soil with proper care. But
the heavier and more clayey it is the greater the
necessity of breaking and lightening it up by plough-
ing under old leaves or manure.
Melons may be planted in hills or drills. The hill
is the older and more popular device. Planting in
rows or drills with plants a foot apart is the modern
plan of many of the large commercial growers. Hills
should be four feet apart if three or more plants are
163
MAY—THE SECOND HALE
allowed to remain in each. Plant at the outset six
or seven seeds to make sure of having three or four
to select from after they show above ground. Of
course, the smaller the number left to grow and de-
velop to the fruiting stage the better in flavour and
larger in size the melons will be. If you have plenty
of room, or if you prefer quality to quantity, leave
only two plants to a hill. If you wish to raise
just a few melons of prize-taking qualities to talk
about and serve at the table for some specially
honoured guest try a few hills with only one plant
each. Itis worth while. For this special crop pinch
off the vine three or four joints beyond the melon
as soon as the fruit is set, so that all the strength and
goodness will go into that one melon.
Preliminary tillage of the ground should be deep
and thorough and a liberal supply of barnyard —
manure should enter into the fertilization. In addi-
tion to the manure that is broadcast over the whole
patch be sure to put a forkful in the bottom of each
hill. Cover that with a thin layer of earth, so the
seed will not come in direct contact with it, and then
put two inches of well-fined earth over the seed.
This must be firmed down with the foot or hoe, as in
164
MAY—THE SECOND HALF
any planting, and then for a finishing touch sprinkle
over a very light cover of loose, dry soil to form a
dust mulch to keep the moisture underground. This
method of planting assures the seed of the best con-
ditions under which to start, and the forkful of
manure under the hill serves as a reserve supply of
plant food for the roots to draw upon when they
most need it to offset the tremendous drain of the
vine and fruit development.
Weed and grass growth must be an unknown quan-
tity in the melon patch, and to this end, as well as to
conserve moisture, there must be very frequent culti-
vation from the time the plants first show, a week or
so after the seed goes into the ground, until the end.
To cultivate the entire ground, even after the vines
have spread widely over-the patch, it is well to use
the small, short-handled weeding tools with which
you can work under the stems and leaves. If neces-
sary the vines may be moved about gently so that
the gardener may get at every inch of the soil.
As a precaution against worms and rotting place
each melon on a shingle rather than let it remain in
contact with the earth.
Every lover of cantaloupe knows his own likes and
165
MAY—THE SECOND HALF
dislikes best, but there are three well-known types of
melon recognised by the Government Department of
Agriculture and by the horticultural societies within
which all the various shapes, sizes and colours of mel-
ons may be classified. These are the Rocky Ford
and Jenny Lind, or small type; the Hackensack, or
medium variety ; and the large Montreal Market. If
you succeed in raising a Rocky Ford or Jenny Lind
about five inches through from the stem end, just a
trifle less than that in the side-to-side diameter, with
a small seed cavity from which the edible part ex-
tends all the way to the rind, shading gradually from
light to deep green, and with the outer surface of
the fruit evenly netted all over, you have got what the
experts would call a perfect melon. [If it is perfect
in all those particulars the flavour and texture are
very apt to be all that they should be.
Yet this may all be spoiled by picking at the wrong
time. The melon is at its best only when allowed
fully to ripen on the vine. The sure test of this ful-
ness of development is the ease with which it may
be plucked. If the slightest tug is required to re-
move the fruit from the vine it is not quite ripe.
Leave it another day or until it comes off in the hand
166
MAY—THE SECOND HALE
almost at a touch. There is one more danger of
your being cheated of the full enjoyment of the per-
fect thing you have produced: Cool the melon but
do not ice it, for that will impair the delicacy of the
flavour you have worked all summer to get.
If your garden is far north, where the growing
season is short, the natural process may be helped
out to a considerable extent by raking into the soil
of the melon patch an application of nitrate of soda.
Two pounds for a patch twenty feet square will be
sufficient. This will materially hasten the plant
growth and put the vine in condition to bear its
fruit earlier.
As a rule the saving of seed by the amateur for
next year’s planting is hardly worth while, because
the professional seedsmen can do that work so much
better and because their product is so cheap. But in
melons Everyman may well make an exception, there-
by adding something of the scientific pleasure of prop-
agation improvement to the ordinary delights of
gardening. But his determination to do this should
be made at the outset of the growth of his vines.
It will not do simply to save the seed of one or two
melons that are particularly juicy or well flavoured.
167
MAY—THE SECOND HALF
The gardener must be sure that those particular
fruits came from vines that were particularly thrifty
in their growth and free from all diseases.
Frequent sprayings with Bordeaux mixture afford
the best remedy for the blight or mildew which often
afflict melon vines. It is worth while to use this
spray as a preventive even if the vines appear to be
all right. Kerosene emulsion will free the leaves
from the melon plant lice and thorough dusting with
tobacco powder is a good thing to save the patch
from the striped cucumber beetle.
CUCUMBERS AND PARSLEY.
The cucumber has an ancient and honourable line-
age. It was a favourite food in India three thou-
sand years ago. A thousand years later the Chinese
adopted it and in the latter part of the sixteenth cen-
tury it was introduced into England. Since then
every generation of gardeners has done something to
improve it.
Nearly everything that has just been said of the
cultivation of the melon could be repeated for the cu-
cumber so far as preparation of the soil and thorough
cultivation after planting are concerned. Sandy
168
MAY |THE: SECOND: HALLS
soil will produce the earliest crop, but cucumbers
planted in a clay loam will, other things being equal,
be more prolific and the vines will produce later.
For succession crops the seed may be planted all
through May and June. Although it will not stand
frost the cucumber is not so sensitive as the melon.
Pests and diseases which attack the two plants are
practically the same and so is the treatment.
If planted in hills, the popular way with the ama-
teur, the cucumbers should be at least three feet
apart and not more than five vines left to a hill.
The first appearance of the leaves should be a week
after the planting and the first of the crop ought to
be ready in nine or ten weeks.
Parsley makes a most attractive border for the
garden, and when so used takes so little room that
Everyman need not hesitate to try a little on the
ground that it is not much of a food product. Its
use aS a garnish for the real dishes adds a little to
the gardener’s pride, which increases in proportion
to the number of different things he can boast of as
of his own raising. It is a slow-going plant at best,
so it should be started by the middle of May; for the
fall crop, seed can be sown through June. Sow
169
MAY—THE SECOND HALF
thickly in very shallow drill along the edges where
borders are wanted, and when the plants are up thin
out to four-inch intervals. For good results the soil
must be reasonably rich, and as nothing but leaf
growth is wanted the fertility may be obtained by
the use of nitrate of soda or pulverized old hen ma-
nure sprinkled beside the row an inch or two from
the plants.
170
CHAP THE XV
Me
JUNE-—THE FIRST HALF
A HEALTHY young plant shows its condition even to
the novice just as a healthy baby does. If you find
a tomato plant of the spindling sort help Nature
out by burying two or three inches of the stem —
that is, make a shallow trench from where the root is
set in the ground, gradually sloping to the surface ;
bend the plant so that a part of the stem may rest
in this trench and be covered with soil. Then bend
the projecting part upright and support it with
stake and string. From the buried part of the stem
a new root system will start, giving enough under-
ground works of the plant to support its growth and
give it a fair chance to yield a crop. But that is a
good deal of bother. It is better to get strong plants
in the beginning. |
The tomato is a plant with a history. It started
in South America, probably in Peru, where it was
171
JUNE—THE FIRST HALF
used as a food, got across the Atlantic to Europe,
where it was cultivated extensively in the Mediter-
ranean countries, and finally crossed the Atlantic
again, this time to the United States, where for years
it was dreaded as a deadly poison. There is a case
on record of an Italian trying to sell some in Salem
the first of the last century. Salem felt as bad about
it as they had about the witches a hundred or more
years before that. But the South was less sceptical.
People began to eat tomatoes in the Gulf of Mexico
region and the habit gradually overspread the coun-
try.
Of this history the one fact that the amateur
in his garden should remember is that the tomato
had its origin in a hot country and has never been
bred or developed out of its dependence upon heat to
make a good showing. The daytime temperature at
which it will do its best is 80 degrees, but it will grow
well in climates with a much lower average tempera-
ture than that. It will do no good, however, to set
the plants out in the open garden until the chill is
entirely gone from the soil, and on cool nights, espe-
cially if a frost is threatened, the young plants
should be covered with newspapers. Give them a
172
JUNE—THE FIRST HALF
southern slope, if you have one in the garden, to as-
sure the maximum of heat and sunlight; also pro-
vide a windbreak to the north.
As for soil, sandy loam is the best but there is no
soil that the tomato will not grow in and produce
fruit if it has proper care and fertilization, always
providing that the drainage is good enough to pre-
vent the standing of water on the surface. Toma-
toes have been grown on a clay heavy enough for the
making of brick and, on the other hand, they have
grown in soil so sandy that the only body’ to
it was what was artificially provided by the working
in of large quantities of manure. So no amateur
gardener need forego the pleasure of raising tomatoes
because of the character of his soil. But the best is
always the best, so if there is a spot of sandy loam
put the tomatoes there. They will not only yield
larger crops, but the fruit will be of better flavour
and more symmetrical in shape.
Shape and flavour suggest, naturally, the three
methods of growth. Plants may be allowed to grow
naturally and straggle over the ground. They may
be left unpruned, but held off the ground by some
four-sided, trellis-like contrivance, or they may be
173
JUNE—THE FIRST HALF
pruned to the single main stem and that tied to a
stake.
Single-stem staking of plants sacrifices some-
thing in the number of fruits because so much of the
bearing portion has to be cut off, but much is gained
in the flavour, general quality, size and shapeliness of
the tomatoes. It stands to reason that a single plant
will do better by a few fruits than by many. Con-
stant cultivation close to the plant is also possible
by this method, and the numerical loss of fruits is
offset in part by the possibility of setting the pruned
plants closer together than those that are allowed to
run where they will, so more can be placed within a
given area. For staking use stout sticks long enough
to go a foot into the ground, with four or five feet
above the surface. They must be placed firmly
enough to bear the constantly increasing weight of
the plants and their crop, and to stand rigid in any
wind ; otherwise a storm may spoil the whole scheme.
Stakes should be set when the plants are put out
— an inch or two away — so there will be no tearing
of the roots by poking the sticks down after growth
has begun. As the upright stem of the plant in-
creases its height, it should be tied every foot or so
174
JUNE—THE FIRST HALF
to the stake, pinching off the side shoots as they ap-
pear and finally pinching off the upright growth of
the main stem itself when it reaches the top of the
stake. Careful observance of these very simple rules
gives not only tomatoes that are perfect to the eye
and to the taste, but a plant that is in itself an orna-
ment to the garden.
Allowing the whole plant to grow, but inclosing it
within the four supporting sides of a lattice-like en-
closure has, in common with the stake system, the ad-
vantage of keeping the foliage and fruits off the
ground and gives the gardener much clear space be-
tween plants in which he can do a lot of useful work
with the hoe. Of course the trellises cost more to
buy and are much more bother to make and the fruit
is apt to lose something in quality because of its
greater abundance.
The third method, that of letting the plant run
all over the ground, with half of its fruit being
spoiled or injured by coming in contact with the soil,
may or may not be justified in a large commercial
patch, but it is certainly not advisable in the small,
well-kept inclosure of the amateur’s garden.
The tomato is one of the few vegetables of which
175
JUNE—THE FIRST HALF
it is worth while for the amateur to save his own
seed. For that purpose select the finest fruits from
the thriftiest plants that have made the best showing
from start to finish. The source of the commercial
supply of seed is not always what it should be.
Some of the big canneries have installed machinery
by which the seeds are separated from the pulp and
these are sold to the seedsman. Since good, bad and
indifferent tomatoes go into the cans the seeds are
of the same degrees of worth and worthlessness.
Barnyard manure is excellent for the tomato patch
and should be worked into the ground if the soil is
lacking in humus -or decaying vegetable matter —
that is, if it is too heavy with clay or too thin with
nothing but sand. But if the texture of the soil
is all right the manure may be left out and the fer-
tilizing done more conveniently and cleanly with
chemicals. There are commercially mixed fertilizers
that serve the purpose, but you may make your own
ideal chemical combination at trifling expense and
with little effort.
For a patch twenty feet square — room for thirty-
six staked plants, placed three feet apart each way
— buy two pounds of nitrate of soda, five pounds of
176
JUNE—THE FIRST HALF
bonemeal and one pound of muriate of potash, a to-
tal of eight pounds. Mix these three essential plant
foods thoroughly, scatter the mixture on the tomato
patch and rake it well into the soil. If here and
there you find a plant that does not seem to be up to
the average of the patch in the making of stem or
leaves its growth may be stimulated by giving it just
an extra pinch of the nitrate of soda. Furthermore
the tomato patch, as well as every other part of the
garden, will show its gratitude for a thin sprinkling
of wood ashes. These take the place of the muriate
of potash.
There are many varieties of tomato plant to se-
lect from. Some are so big that they might almost
be classed as vegetable freaks, but seldom do these
varieties produce a large proportion of shapely, per-
fect fruits of good flavour. For your own garden
there are no surer, more satisfactory standbys than
Farliana for the early crop and the Stone tomato
for the main crop. Out of every five plants set out
four should be Stone.
Like the tomato, the eggplant is of tropical origin,
and all suggestions concerning the former vegetable
as to soil, temperature, protection, cultivation and
Li
JUNE—THS PIRS Pare
selections of thrifty plants apply to it. The plants
should be set from two and a half to three feet apart
and the soil — sandy loam if you have it — must be
kept friable by frequent cultivation. The chemical
formula given for tomatoes may be modified to, advan-
tage for egg-plant fertilization by adding an extra
pound of muriate of potash to the mixture.
Peppers, the third plant in this same group for
setting out in June, will thrive best under exactly
the same conditions of soil and culture that have
been laid down for the eggplant.
In the early stages of their growth the eggplant,
pepper and tomato plants may be nipped off close
to the ground by cutworms. The drier the weather
the greater the danger from this pest. Get rid of
the worms by making a poisonous mash of wheat
bran and Paris green and sprinkling the stuff on the
ground near the plants. This is the easiest and at
the same time the most effective way.
Then there is the green tomato worm as big round
as your little finger and from two to three inches
long, armed with a horn on its head. Other pests
prey upon these worms themselves to such an extent
that they seldom become numerous and do little dam-
178
JUNE—THE FIRST HALF
age to the plants by eating the leaves, their sole
method of attack. They are so conspicuous that
they may be got rid of simply by knocking them off
and crushing them on the ground.
The next one of the enemies to be watched for is
a smaller worm that bores into the fruit itself. It is
the same animal that gets into an ear of corn and eats
the kernels. Tomato patches remote from the corn
are seldom seriously troubled by it. A Parisgreen
spray will kill it and this poison may be used with
absolute safety when the fruits are small and green.
Various small insects, including the flea beetle,
may be kept off the plants by dipping them before
planting in a solution of an ounce of arsenate of
lead in three gallons of water.
Aside from the green worm with the horned head,
eggplants and tomatoes have practically the same
insect enemies and the treatment is the same for both
plants. Except for the cutworm and a weevil that
is confined to the Southern states the pepper is re-
markably free from living pests.
Spraying all three — eggplant, peppers and toma-
toes — with Bordeaux mixture will prevent or con-
trol the fungous diseases that sometimes afflict them.
179
CHAPTER XVII
&
JUNE—THE SECOND HALF
Ir you are sticking by your own place for your sum-
mer vacation, having decided that you will not only
save money that way but will get more real fun and
relaxation in your garden than anywhere else, you
can still enjoy holiday travel in your mind by try-
ing to do in that garden as an extra diversion what
some other amateur in another part of the country
or of the world does in his garden as a matter of
course. One chief purpose of going away is to see
strange things. Raise strange things in your gar- _
den. No matter what part of the country you
may be in, there are some flowers and vegetables
unknown in your neighbourhood that will justify a
little experimentation, providing you have a few
square ‘feet still unoccupied. Now, near the end of
June, when the serious part of the garden work is
all planned and well under way, is the time for a
little frivolity with soil and seed.
180
JUNE—THE SECOND HALF
Try peanuts, for example, if you have a hundred
days left before the average date of the killing frost
of your region. You have that much time unless
your garden happens to be in Northern New Eng-
land or in the upper tier of the Western states.
Plant a few gourds for the oddity of the things.
They grow very quickly and are to be cultivated in
about the same way that melons are. You can prob-
ably grow your own calabash pipe and a dipper for
the kitchen.
Having your pipe, or several of them to supply
guests, you will naturally think of tobacco. Raise
some of that too, not because the smoking of it will
be very satisfactory, but for the fun of the thing.
A plant or two are worth trying almost anywhere
south of New York, and tobacco is raised success-
fully in the Connecticut River Valley way up into
Massachusetts. When you have raised one or two
tobacco plants — they grow to a height of four feet
or more — hang them by the stems to the barn or
attic rafters to cure. Open the windows on dry,
bright days and close them in wet, foggy weather
so the dampness will not cause mildew on the leaves.
That is the way your white ancestors did in this
181
JUNE—THE SECOND HALF
country, having learned the trick from the Indians.
The women of the house can match the men’s to-
bacco and calabash victory by pouring for their
friends some tea grown in the home garden — if that
garden is in any one of eight or ten of the Southern
Atlantic or Gulf Coast states.
The sweet potato is another uncommon vegetable
for the amateur’s garden, but it is much more than
a freak or a joke crop. It is grown in quantities in
Southern New Jersey, and eighty miles farther
north it has done well in small gardens for the home
table.
Pumpkins and Hubbard squash, which belong nat-
urally in the New England states, are worth trying
in other parts of the country to get a home-grown
supply of the things that make the best pies. If
there is still room try a little garlic.
Now to be more specific about these uncommon
things with which you may amuse and interest your-
self. There are at least twelve kinds of gourds that
will grow in almost any part of the country. They
all make rapid and extended growth and can best be
disposed of by trailing over a fence or trellis, where
they will be out of the way and where their orna-
182
JUNE—THE SECOND HALF
mental foliage and curious fruits will make the best
showing. Get the dipper and bottle varieties as
well as the calabash, and try one Chinese Luffa, the
inside of which can be used as a sponge. Gourds
can be planted throughout June. Put the seed two
inches deep in a sandy loam, and before planting
work in a forkful of old manure.
The sweet potato has nothing in common with the
ordinary tuber so far as cultural methods and re-
quirements are concerned.. Buy the plants and set
them out in sandy soil in rows three feet apart, with
foot intervals between the plants in the row. Keep
an eye on the weather and try to do this work just
before a shower.
Light soil is essential, and the more it is broken up
by the forking in of manure to renew the humus sup-
ply the better for the crop. For fertilizing pur-
poses chemicals are better than the barnyard ma-
nure used alone. So for a sweet-potato patch about
twenty feet square supplement the previously worked-
in manure with the following mixture: One pound
of nitrate of soda, two pounds of bone black and a
pound of sulphate of potash. Clean cultivation is
essential throughout the period of growth. If frost
183
JUNE—THE SECOND HALF
should catch jyou before the potatoes are quite as
large as they should be harvest them just the same.
There will be no loss in flavour or quality.
Peanuts should be planted later than corn or lima
beans, for they are even more sensitive to a lingering
coolness in the soil. ‘The earth must be of the right
sort mechanically, for the peanut buries itself and it
cannot do that if the ground is hard or stiff. Not
only sandy soil is necessary, but it must be well tilled
and loosened up to a depth of six or eight inches and
kept in this condition until after the plant has per-
formed its ostrich-like feat of burying its head in
the sand.
The peanut is not a root, as most people suppose.
Neither is it a nut. The plant blossoms above
~ ground; then when the flower has shed everything
but the ovary, which is provided with a sharp point
for boring, the stem turns earthward and the ovary
bores its way into the soil, where it develops into
the pod. The root system is as entirely separate
from the peanut as the root of the bean plant is
from its pod. If possible get the seed from a dealer
who sells peanuts for planting purposes and who can
tell you what variety you are getting — whether the
184
JUNE—THE SECOND HALF
Spanish, the Virginia runner or the Virginia bunch
—as knowing the variety will enable you to space
your hills to the best advantage. But if that is not
convenient just go to the fruit and nut store for
your supply, making sure of course to get peanuts
_that have not been roasted. Virginia runner peanuts
should be planted in rows a yard apart, with sixteen-
inch intervals in the row. The bunch variety can
be in rows only thirty inches apart, the plants only
nine inches apart in the row. The same distances
will do for the Spanish and Tennessee Reds,
Buy a quart of the best-looking peanuts you can
find in the store, pick out those of the best shape
and size and shell them. Plant three or four shelled
nuts every sixteen inches to provide against fail-
ure to germinate, but after they have started pull
out all but one plant from each group. Cover the
seeds with an inch and a half of soil. Peanuts may be
planted in the shell, but the germination is several
days slower.
It is the Spanish peanut that is used for the mak-
ing of peanut butter. Roast the nuts, before or
after shelling, in a moderate oven, until they become
crisp without any suggestion of burning. Stir them
185
JUNE—THE SECOND HALF
about frequently in the course of the roasting proc-
ess so they will be done evenly. Then remove the
red skins, split the nuts, knock off the seed germs be-
tween the halves, and put the separated nuts through
the meat grinder. Grind them as fine and smooth as
3
possible and put the “ butter” away in sealed jars.
Making the butter, however, is getting ahead of
the story. Let us finish raising the peanuts first.
To do that successfully the soil must not only be in
the right mechanical condition to let the stems get
underground, but it must be amply supplied with
lime and well fertilized.
For a patch of ground twenty feet square put on
ten pounds of agricultural lime and work it in when
the preliminary spading or plowing for the peanut
crop is being done. Apply the fertilizer later, half
at the time of planting and half after the plants show
above ground. This fertilizer should not be barn-
yard manure unless you apply it a year in advance.
There is a double danger in using the manure at the
time of planting. It contains too many weed seeds
and it is apt to cause an abnormal growth of leaf
and stem of the peanut plant and small and only
partly filled pods.
186
JUNE—THE SECOND HALF
Here is a good chemical mixture for potatoes
which makes an ideal fertilizer for peanuts, reduced
to proportions for the twenty-foot-square patch:
Two pounds and a half of nitrate of soda, six pounds
of bonemeal and two pounds of muriate of potash.
This must be thoroughly mixed into the soil with a
rake. If you have any wood ashes they will serve
well on the peanut ground as a substitute for the
muriate of potash.
Cultivation must begin immediately after planting
and should be kept up faithfully until the plants are
well developed and begin to form the pods. With
each cultivation work a new supply of loose soil
toward the plants from both sides, so that the stems
will be assured of a soft bed of earth in which to
bury the ends. It is not necessary to bury these
ends yourself. Nature will look after that if she
has half a chance.
Harvest the peanut crop when the vines begin to
turn yellow in the fall. Careful digging with a
potato fork is the best way. Peanut plants are re-
markably free from insect pests and disease, but do
not tempt fate by planting them on the same ground
next year, no matter how good a crop you may get
187
JUNE—THE SECOND HALF
this season. They require rotation, so if the pea-
nut experiment is to be repeated another season plant
them where the corn is now. Crop or no crop, re-
member this— the mere growing of the peanut
vines in your garden will greatly improve the soil,
for they are great gatherers of nitrogen.
Both pumpkins and the winter or Hubbard squash
may be planted in June. You need only a few, so
the hills should be eight feet apart, with three plants
growing from each hill. Sandy soil is best. Cover
the seed with an inch and a half of soil and have in
the bottom of each hill a forkful of old manure.
Then cultivate well and watch them grow.
188
CHAPTER AVI!
&
JULY—THE FIRST WEEK
Att the arguments for having home-grown fresh
fruits and vegetables in the season of their harvest
may be advanced with even greater force and reason
in favour of carrying the supply right on through
the winter and until it is time for you to start your
garden for another year. Great as the difference
may be between a mess of green peas picked from the
vines back of the house shortly before dinner and a
mess from the grocery store, there is a still greater
difference between the quality of the home-grown and
home-canned peas and the can that is bought. This
difference is not only in flavour and tenderness, but
in the comfortable assurance of cleanliness and per-
haps safety from disease and poison.
Of course pure-food laws have done much good
and there are many big commercial concerns putting
up the best fruits and vegetables in the best way
189
JULY—THE FIRST WEEK
they know. But they don’t grow the stuff in the
first place, and they cannot control the time of
its picking and the time that must elapse between
picking and canning —two factors that are very
essential in the matter of having vegetables in winter
that can compare in colour, taste and tenderness
with the summer supply.
Furthermore, nothing is so conducive to your sense
of independence as to furnish a material part of your
own food supply, not merely for a few months, but
for the complete round of the calendar. It may
mark your transition from the salaried man who
works in one place and lives in another to the happy
state of the prosperous farmer who gets all his living
from his own land. Scores of modern, scientific
farmers of to-day were born in cities, moved to the
suburbs as their first experiment, and got their first —
dream of owning acres from the fun of having a
two-by-four-foot radish bed. But back to the can-
ning.
The winter’s supply should be provided for in the
original laying out of the garden and in the scheme
for succession planting and companion cropping.
If you neglected that important matter at the be-
190
JULY—THE FIRST WEEK |
ginning of the season it is not too late to offset the
blunder now by making allowance in the mid-season
planting for later crops.
Try to arrange the harvest times of the fruits and
vegetables that are to be kept for winter so they will
come as close together as possible. This will mean
the bunching of the business and save much hard
work in a hot kitchen. It is as difficult to put up
one can as a dozen, so there is no point in spreading
the process out over the summer.
If the gardener arranges his end of the business
skillfully his wife ought to be able to put up food
enough for all winter in several canning periods of
not more than three days each. One row of beans,
for example, may be all he will want to come into
bearing at one time to furnish a supply to be eaten
as it is picked. But if there is room it is better to
have all the bean supply to be canned come from one
planting of as many rows as are required.
Cultivation and ample fertilization have direct
bearmg on the winter supply as well as on the day-
to-day output of the garden, because only the best
should be put in cans; and vegetables that are grown
quickly, even forced a little by plenty of plant food,
FOt
JIJULY—THE(FAIRS T WEEE
make the best showing when put up. They should
be picked at the proper time to retain their tender-
ness and colour — a day or two earlier than would be
necessary if they were to be eaten fresh from the
vines. That is the secret of successful canning.
Anything that is left on the vines a day or an hour
too long, until the hardening and yellowing process
sets in, is going to be tough, lacking in flavour and
in that delightful natural-green colour that ought to
distinguish all home-canned garden products from
the commercial varieties.
There are two more points to look after closely:
Pick in the morning when the dew is on the plants,
before there is any suggestion of wilting; have the
jars and the various cooking utensils in readiness,
the fire going well and the water boiling. Then do
the necessary shelling, stringing, cutting up and
other preparatory work in a cool place and rush the |
fruits or vegetables to the sterilizing jars. If care-
ful work is done in the sterilizing, cooking and seal-
ing the vegetables will keep for months in very much
the same condition as at the start, so the taking of
pains in the preliminaries is well worth while.
The old notion was that excluding the air was what
192
ULY- Tar iRS T WEEK
kept things from spoiling. This was based on the
wrong theory that oxygen caused the decay of vege-
table matter. It is still necessary to keep the air
out, not because it in itself or the oxygen makes
trouble, but because it is filled with germs, and the
old way of sealing the jars with metal or glass tops
is still the mest convenient thing to do.
The canning possibilities begin with rhubarb in
spring and do not end until Thanksgiving, when
pumpkin and mincemeat bring them to a fitting
close,
Contemporaneous with the rhubarb is asparagus.
The home canner may cut the asparagus into the
long portions usually served and pack them care-
fully, tips upward, in wide-mouthed jars. But the
simpler way is to cut the tender tips into pieces an
inch and a half long and pack the jars as full as
possible. Then fill the jars with cold water, adjust
the covers loosely and place the whole in the steamer
to be boiled for an hour, with the steam escaping.
Then clamp on the covers tight and allow the jars to
cool until next day. On the second day, with the
covers loosened again, put the jars in the steamer
and allow them to remain there for an hour after the
193
JULY—THE FIRST WEEK
water comes to a boil. Clamp and cool till the third
day, when, after the third boiling, the jars are sealed
permanently.
The reason for these repeated boilings is that while
the parent bacteria succumb to the first high tem-
perature, their spores are more tenacious of life and
begin to germinate promptly as soon as the first cool-
ing process is under way. The second boiling kills
off this second batch of bacteria before they have
developed new spores. The third boiling, while not
absolutely necessary, makes assurance doubly sure
and enables the housewife to seal her jars with the
certainty that they will keep perfectly.
By the end of June the canning season proper is
on, with the peas and the beans as the top-liners of
the performance. The best peas for canning are the
early varieties. The later ones cannot be relied upon
to be tender and of the sweetness that has made this
special delicacy famous. Peas should be gathered
a day or two earlier than is usual for table use, picked
while still cool and dewy, shelled by the collaboration
of the household on a breezy porch, then packed in
clean jars and cooked by steam according to the di-
rections given for asparagus.
194
JULY—THE FIRST WEEK
For string beans the same rule applies. Be sure
to gather the beans while they are a little smaller
than one would want them for immediate consump-
tion. This precaution is especially important in. the
case of peas and beans and makes all the difference
in the world in the finished product. Both these
vegetables lose considerable bulk in the cooking
process. For this reason it is well to put one extra
jar through the steaming operation and then use its
contents for the filling of the others after their con-
tents have shrunk at the end of the first day’s boiling.
Corn is regarded by many as an unlucky vegetable
for canning. But if picked while very tender, cut
from the cob at once with a keen knife that leaves no
ragged kernels, packed tightly into the jars, which
are then filled with cold water, and cooked by steam
as already described, there should be no difficulty.
Another way is to take extra large jars, say of the
four-quart size, and can the corn on the cob.
To do this it is necessary to select very tender
ears of a small-cob variety. They should be sub-
jected to the boiling process for an hour and a half
instead of an hour on each of the three days. The
result will be a platter of corn on the cob on your
195
JULY—THE FIRST WEEK
table in midwinter, equal in appearance and flavour
to that of summer.
Tomatoes deserve an epic all their own. Their
peculiar and delicious acid is most desirable as an
offset to the heavy winter menus. They are the
simplest of all vegetables to can and to keep and
offer a variety of uses such as nothing else in the
garden can. First choose your tomato — a depend-
able, solid variety, such as the Stone.
Gather the fruit while it is in its prime, not in the
least overripe or watery. Scald the tomatoes, there-
by making the removal of the skins a very easy mat-
ter, and cut the pulp into quarters, merely to hasten
the cooking. Then fill a graniteware or porcelain-
lined kettle — never an iron one. Tomatoes cook
down very materially, so one can keep adding fresh-
cut fruits to this first batch until the simmering ©
mass is all the kettle can hold.
When the whole kettleful is boiling well the tomato
juice will be found at the top, the heavy mass of pulp |
sinking lower down. Take advantage of this little
fact of physics by dipping off this boiling juice
separately into a hot sterilized jar and sealing it at
once for future tomato soups.
196
JULY—THE FIRST WEEK
One who enjoys foreign cooking will not fail to
prepare a generous supply of the salza— sauce —
that enters so largely into the meat and vegetable
dishes of French and Italian households. This is
simply tomato cooked with celery and onion enough
to flavour it well, then put through a very coarse
strainer, giving a delicious, thick, pulpy sauce. It
will transform a plain omelette into a feast.
Summer squash may be prepared and cooked as
for the table, the excess water drained off, and the
pulp packed solidly in jars and steamed for an hour
and a half a day for three consecutive days before
sealing.
Beets should be young and very tender. Prepare
as for the table, slice thin, cover with water, and
steam only an hour on each of the three days.
Canned eggplant is a great acquisition to the home
bill of fare. Pare and cut into thin slices and leave
them in boiling water half an hour. Then drain,
pack into jars and steam as you did the squash.
The half-hour cooking of the eggplant before can-
ning makes the slices pliable, so they can be easily
packed into the jars. When opened for use drain
and cook like fresh eggplant.
197
JULY—THE FIRST WEEK
If the cauliflower crop shows signs of not keeping
well the heads may be prepared as for the table,
packed into jars and sterilized, ready to be reheated
and the desired sauce or seasoning added.
Many persons can even carrots and parsnips,
claiming that these vegetables when small are free
from the strong flavours they develop if allowed to
come to maturity, and so are really more palatable
than if stored in the cellar.
Lima beans are canned in the same manner as corn
or peas. Canning the pumpkin or winter squash is
the only sure way of keeping these vegetables beyond
December or January. It is done just as in the case
of the summer squash.
198
CHAPTER XIX
®
JsUuULY——THE SECON DI OWEEE
Juxy is the month in which the gardener must co-
operate with Nature in bringing to perfection what,
between them, they have already started. It is the
month for developing and putting on finishing
touches in form and size and colour rather than a
period of starting new things. This is particularly
true in the flower garden and with the shrubs and
hedges. Of course with vegetables it is always seed-
time so long as there is a vacant space left and a
‘sufficient number of days before frost for some quick-
growing food supply to come to maturity.
In the flower garden the new beginnings are nar-
rowed down to the fillmg in of empty spaces, where
this or that plant has died, by the setting out of a
late aster or a bit of flowering stock. The rule to
fill in thé gaps and offset the losses is always a good
199
\
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
one to follow in a flower garden, not only for the
sake of appearances but for the health of all the
plants. The fault of the amateur gardener is not
that he crowds too much into a given space, but that
he leaves too much bare ground in his flower beds,
or waste space for weeds to occupy. Nature covers
every square inch.
The amateur’s error is due to his good intention to
have what is mistaken for an appearance of neatness
in too wide patches of cleanly cultivated earth. A
flowering shrub or plant is more attractive than a
spot of bare soil, no matter how clean it is. And
enough plant food can be supplied to nourish every
leaf and blossom there is room for.
This brings us to consideration of the prime job
of July in the flower garden — summer fertilization
to add to the richness of the flower colours and to
deepen the green of the foliage.
It is assumed that you were liberal with manure at
the outset of the season, when you planted your seed
and set out young plants. But there has been a
drain on that original supply of plant food during
the past two months to make the body of the plants
and the early blossoms. More plant food now, sup-
200
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
plemented by judicious cutting back and pruning,
will prolong the flowering season of some of the
roses and other plants that are supposed to end early
in June. It will increase many times the vigour of
the plants that blossom all summer, and it is par-
ticularly valuable for the things that are just now
coming into flower, such as the Japanese iris and
the many fine varieties of phlox.
The ideal plant food for all flowers through the
summer is liquid manure. This is best made from
cow manure if you can possibly obtain it. Be wary
about the use of horse manure unless you are very
sure it is old and thoroughly rotted. Horse manure
will do very well to dig in for the spring fertilization,
when the ground is being prepared. It is a risky
thing now, as are chemicals. So try to find a man
with a cow and get a wheelbarrow load from his dung-
hill.
Put a bushel of the cow manure into an old grain
sack and suspend it in a barrel of water. A fifty-
gallon kerosene barrel or an old liquor cask of the
same capacity can be obtained for little money at a
store and will serve this useful purpose for many sea-
sons. Hang the bag of manure in the water so it
201
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
swings clear of the bottom of the barrel and leave it
three days.
A gallon of the mixture is not too much for one
full-grown rose plant. Before applying it scrape
the earth out for a foot or more all round the plant,
just deep enough to make a shallow basin. Then
pour in the gallon of liquid manure and as soon as it
has soaked into the soil cover the moistened circle
with earth to prevent evaporation. That particular
rose plant will fairly revel in the richness of its nour-
ishment. Repeat this application two weeks later.
For the phlox and iris and all the rest apply the
same kind of fertilizer, but in smaller quantities.
If you cannot secure cow manure, sheep manure,
pulverized and bagged, is a handy and efficient sub-
stitute. It is a more highly concentrated fertilizer
than cow manure and should therefore be used more —
sparingly. A small quantity mixed with the soil
about the rose plants will give almost as good results
as those attained from a liquid application.
To get the continued rose supply from this en-
richment you must cut back the flower-producing
portions to about two eyes, the nearer to old wood
the better. If you are fortunate enough to have a
202
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
Mrs. John Lang rose — the very best there is for the
amateur’s garden — it will bloom all season, anyway,
but with added enrichment of this sort it will be the
delight of the neighbourhood.
This matter of cutting back is worth a digres-
sion. Many things benefit by it. Golden glow, for
instance, if cut down to within six inches of the
ground when the first flowers begin to go by, will
send out short side stems bearing a second growth of
blossoms to follow the August glow. The same with
phlox. Cut off the July flower heads before the
seeds form and there will be a prolonged season of
phlox blossoms. This digression might be length-
ened to cover many other plants, but you should dis-
cover some of these things for yourself by experi-
menting. Bonemeal is another safe and effective fer-
tilizer for July use. A pound of it is not too much
for a single rose plant of good size, while a handful
will do for smali bushes and for flowers of other
varieties. Always remember that the rose is a heavy
feeder and if it goes hungry it will not produce the
colour or the fragrance that your garden plan calls
for.
Cultivate all summer, incidentally, to keep the
203
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
weeds out of the flower garden, principally, to main-
tain a mulch of loose surface soil which will hold the
moisture underground where the roots can get the
benefit of it. A well-cultivated garden will do much
better throughout an entire season marked by
drought than a neglected garden will do in a summer
of ample rainfall. That is not merely a theory of
soil chemists; it is a hard fact that applies to every
patch of ground that man ever tried to turn to his
own account.
To save time and wear on the back do the culti-
vating with the push hoe or English scuffle hoe,
rather than with the chop hoe. With the scuffle the
cultivation is more shallow, but it is more thorough
in breaking the capillarity of the soil — that is,
the small tubes that form themselves into outlets for
the moisture to the surface if they are not broken. —
Use the hoe after each shower, thus saving for future
use of the plants all the moisture that Nature has
bestowed.
There is one alternative to frequent cultivation —
that is in having a permanent mulch of something
other than the broken surface of the soil. In Eng-
land, where they have the best gardens in the world,
204
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
especially of roses, it is customary to keep a mulch of
cow manure two or three inches deep spread over the
bed throughout the growing season. This keeps the
weeds down and the moisture in and with every
shower the water, percolating through the mulch,
carries with it to the roots of the plants the rich-
ness of liquid manure. But the average gardener in
America would object to that method on the ground
that it would be unsightly. But the fact remains
that the English raise the finest roses. It is partly
due to their cow-manure mulch method and partly to
the fact that they are not afraid to prepare a rose
bed four or five feet deep in clay soil. But that is
another story.
If a shower falls on your garden in the middle of a
summer day and is followed by sunshine there is no
doubt that it is beneficial. Nevertheless stick to the
rule that for artificial watering it is better to use the
hose or sprinkling pot at sunset than at midday.
And when you do water at night do it thoroughly —
as thoroughly as possible without causing the soil
to wash. Ten gallons put on at one time will do
more good than twenty gallons doled out niggardly
over a period of several days. A good watering once
205
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
a week in dry times, supplemented by cultivation, is
about right for the flower garden.
Don’t forget that the pests are with you all sum-
mer in one form or another. Just about now you
are at the height of the rose-bug season. That
nuisance generally begins his feasting on the peonies
and then shifts to the roses for his second course.
He is also very fond of the coreopsis. Daily inspec-
tion of the plants and picking the bugs off by hand
is the only insurance against the destruction of every-
thing and anything they attack. There is no spray
that will fit their case.
Hand picking is also the only sure method of pro-
tection against the aster beetle. Another helpful
thing to do is to get rid of all goldenrod that grows
anywhere near your aster bed. Wherever the gold-
enrod grows you will find the black beetle, that is—
death to asters. Hand picking for this insect should
be a task for every morning. Then there are the
leaf borer, the thrips and the green fly. Tobacco
spray, either dust or liquid, will rid plants of the fly.
Hollyhocks all through the country have of recent
years become a prey to the red spider, which attacks
the under surface of the leaves, especially when the
206
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
plants, for any reason, are not in thrifty condition.
The spider sucks out the juices of the leaf. So the
hollyhocks must be well nourished with plenty of
plant food —bonemeal, cow or sheep manure —
and have good cultivation. The hollyhock also
offers an exception to the general rule against thin-
ning. If the stalks begin to crowd, thin them out at
the surface of the ground. As an added precaution
against the red spider, spray with tobacco or weak
kerosene emulsion.
There is a general rule to be applied to the prun-
ing of all flowering shrubs — that is, do it as soon as
the flowering is over and at no other time. That
means a job for July, which is a flowerless month so
far as the majority of the shrubs are concerned,
their chief glory coming in April, May and June.
The reason for the rule is this — the flowers of the
year to come will grow on the wood that is formed
between the blooming seasons. Nature requires a
full year to bring that wood to bearing, so if it is
cut off in the fall or winter or spring there will be no
flowering.
Do not prune the Japanese barberry much at any
time if you want it to be a winter ornament, filled
207
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
with red berries, when outdoor colour is hard to find.
Pruning of hedges is another matter. They are
primarily for boundaries, not for colour. Pruning
should be done when form and shapeliness demand it.
A California privet hedge grows about as rapidly and
as irregularly as the hair on the head of a small boy
with a cowlick and a double crown. It should be
trimmed about as frequently too. The. box hedge, if
neglected, not only loses its shape but also its dense
habit of growth, which is its chief merit.
Here is a suggestion for a plant in your flower
garden that should be popular in this country, but
is not. It is the Viola cornuta, or tufted pansy.
If you can get it established in your garden — not a
difficult matter — you are reasonably sure of having
its flowers in the open from May until snow falls,
with as wide a range of colour as that offered by the
ordinary pansies. In England, where the plant is
common, there are no less than sixty varieties.
The plants can be bought in this country from
many of the seedsmen in the big towns. They are
fine for borders, and if you are ambitious enough to
have a bit of rock work in your garden the tufted
pansy is the thing to give it colour. It is rather
208
JULY—THE SECOND WEEK
late, but try a few plants this year for an experi-
ment, being sure, of course, to give them the benefit
of a muslin screen protection against the hot sun
until they get rooted. They require reasonably rich
ground,
209
CHAPTER XX
®
TULY—THE THIRD WEEK
Juty planning and consideration of root crops, with
reference to a supply of home-grown vegetables for
the table next winter, naturally falls under two
heads: What more can you plant at this period of
the summer? And what is the best treatment for
the roots already under cultivation to bring them
to the highest state of perfection for keeping?
Throughout the middle of the country there is
ample time for the planting of beets, carrots, ruta-
baga and the ordinary turnip. The.last two vege-
tables are possible throughout the month, even in
New England. If your garden happens to be south
of a line drawn roughly across country touching the
northern edges of Kentucky and Maryland you may
make a planting of potatoes as late as the first of
August. The custom is to use seed saved from last
year, in many cases from the second crop. Seed
210
JULY—THE THIRD WEEK
potatoes need a rest varying from a few weeks to a
few months, depending upon the variety.
It is not customary to plant parsnips —a root
that should be much more popular than it is — later
than April. That is the parsnip-planting time pre-
scribed by usage and all the garden authorities. But
it is always interesting and never harmful to deviate
a little from authority in the garden and try an
experiment on your own hook. The methods of cul-
tivating the parsnip are exactly the same as those
laid down for the carrot.
It is true that it is a very slow-growing vegetable,
requiring about 125 days to come to maturity, but
that is largely offset by the fact that frost never
hurts the parsnip. As a matter of fact many gar-
deners leave the parsnips undug until after the
ground has frozen, in the belief that they thus
acquire more sweetness and better flavour.
The potato, of course, is the chief staple food you
can raise. Your early crop, directions for which
were given in chapter two, is about ready to dig —
in many parts of the country it has already been dug
and has added its very material contribution to the
delights of a summer garden. But the main crop
211
JULY—THE THIRD WEEK
— the potatoes you hope to eat next winter — 1s
just getting where it needs careful attention to make
it worth digging at all.
"The potato bug is something that the greenest
novice in the garden can get rid of if he is willing to
work a little, either by hand picking or with his
spray. But the late blight of vines and the rot of
the potatoes themselves which is sure to follow that
blight are more difficult to understand and to con-—
trol. It can be done by that same novice and his |
crop will pay him for the trouble.
In taking care of the blight you kill two birds with
one stone, for the treatment not only saves the vines,
but makes the crop larger in size and numbers and
better in quality. Vine blight comes from the seed
in which fungus trouble has developed through the
winter. Affected potatoes sometimes show a pinkish
tinge and dry rot, but it is not always possible to
detect this at planting time, so you may put in af-
fected seed potatoes without realizing it. The
germs spread to the sprouts as soon as there is any
considerable amount of moisture to give them a start,
and soon spread over the growing vines, blighting the
foliage and checking the growth of the tubers them-
212
JULY—THE THIRD WEEK
selves. But that is only part of the process.
allowed to take its course the blight produces spores >
that fall back to the surface and make their way
underground to attack the new potatoes.
To save the potatoes you must begin by saving
the vines. That is best done by spraying with Bor-
deaux mixture at least once a fortnight, and oftener
in very wet weather, until the plant stops growth
and the normal wilt begins. The spraying should
begin of course as soon as the leaves show the slight-
est symptoms of being unhealthy. But you will
make no mistake if you adopt the Bordeaux treat-
ment when your plants are about four inches high,
even if they do not appear to be affected.
Spraying before a shower is always advisable, be-
cause it kills the germs that are sure to spread as
soon as the plants become wet. If an ounce of Paris
green is thoroughly stirred into ten gallons of the
Bordeaux the spray will not only take care of the -
blight, but of the potato bugs too with one opera-
tion.
The sure sign of blight or rot is when the leaves
begin to show dark spots, which soon turn soft and
give off a very disagreeable odor.
213
JULY—THE THIRD WEEK
Cultivate the potato patch with the hoe through-
out the growing season, and when the vines begin to
overspread the bare ground between the rows it will
not hurt a bit to do a little hand work to get out the
weeds that will grow close to the vines and rob the
soil of just so much plant food that should go into
the making of the crop. This hand work will also
maintain your earth mulch right up to the stems of
the plants and thus save the moisture for the roots.
Fertilizing for the potato should be done before
planting. As a matter of fact it is best done the
year before planting, when a grass field that is to be-
come a potato patch the following season should be
heavily enough manured for two years. In this way
you get the required richness in the ground without
the danger of fungus diseases of the potato that
lurk in barnyard manure when it is first spread, or
the risk of burning by the use of chemicals,
Nevertheless a little judicious fertilizing after the
growth of the plants begins is sometimes necessary
to get a good crop. So if the plants seem hungry
and lack thrift, when there is no disease to account
for the difficulty, apply some of the special potato
214
JULY—THE THIRD WEEK
fertilizers that the seedsman sells and rake it in be-
tween the rows. Remember that this special potato
food should be richer in potash than in either of the
other two main fertilizing ingredients. Wood ashes,
which contain eight or nine per cent of potash,
would be useful were it not for the large content of
lime which favours the growth of scab.
The rutabaga is a Russian or Swedish turnip;
some professional gardeners call them “ Swedes ” for
short. They are less watery than the ordinary tur-
nip, have a richer flavour, and keep better through
the winter. They also require a little more time to
mature, but there is time enough this year to raise
rutabaga and other turnips for next winter.
To save trouble the seed may be sown broadcast
over the piece of the garden that is available for this
vegetable. The plants will come up within a week
and very thickly. Thin out so that each root left
will have enough ground room in which to make its
size, and there will at the same time be turnip plants
enough left on the patch to keep the weeds out and
eliminate, in part, the necessity of cultivating. A
better way is to plant them in rows a foot or foot
215
JULY—THE THIRD WEEK
and a half apart, with six-inch intervals between the
plants, and cultivate as you would any other row
crop.
The best fertilizer for turnips, rutabagas and beets
is a mixture in the following proportions for a patch
of about twenty by forty feet: Pound and a half of
nitrate of soda, four pounds of bonemeal and two
pounds of muriate of potash. Buy your own chem-
icals in quantities to suit the size of your garden and
mix them thoroughly yourself before raking into the
soil. The cost is very slight.
The ideal soil is sandy loam, and the finer it is
kept the better. The turnip will not thrive in a
drought, no matter how rich the soil is, unless the
moisture is kept in the ground by frequent breaking
up of the surface. In a very dry time the turnip
will benefit greatly from liberal watering with the
hose after the heat of the day is over.
Club root, the same disease that afflicts calibape
often attacks turnips and rutabagas. It is not a
complaint that can be cured by spraying, so the
only thing to do is to prevent it. Don’t put the |
turnips where there was a root crop of any sort last
year ; take every precaution possible to get good seed ;
216
JULY—THE THIRD WEEK
and as soon as a young plant shows signs of being
abnormal pull it out and burn it.
Maggots working underground sometimes bore
into the turnips themselves. Water the ground with
strong suds made from carbolic soap. Slight freez-
ing will not hurt the turnips, so the harvesting of
this crop may be left till about the last thing in the
fall work.
For carrots the best fertilizing formula differs
somewhat from that just given for the beets and tur-
nips, being stronger in the bonemeal, which supplies
the phosphoric acid, and containing less of the ni-
trate and potash. The mixture for the carrots on
the twenty-by-forty-foot basis should be one pound
of nitrate of soda, six pounds of bonemeal and one
pound of muriate of potash.
For anybody who has noted the fine, lacelike char-
acter of the carrot leaf the hint that there should be
no coarse weeds near it is probably unnecessary.
Neglect of weeding in the carrot bed from the very
outset means the demoralization of the crop.
Sandy soil is best, and the more deeply it is culti-
vated the more shapely and the smoother the carrot
roots will be. The rows should be a foot apart and
217
JULY—THE THIRD WEEK
four-inch intervals between plants is sufficient for —
the smaller varieties, which are the better ones for
the home garden. They will keep better if pulled
before maturity.
A beetle sometimes causes trouble by eating young
carrot plants. It is a difficult thing to get rid of
if it comes, and about the only thing worth trying
is a spray of a very light solution of arsenate of lead.
An ounce of the poison in about three gallons of
water will do.
There are companion vegetables for nearly all the
root crops — that is, quick-growing things that may
be planted at the same time and which will be out of
the way before the principal vegetables in the com-
panion-cropping combination need all the ground.
For example, put the root rows a little farther apart
than you would ordinarily to have room for cultiva-
tion, and put radishes between them.
218
CMAPTER Xi AI
®
JULY THE FOURTH WEEE
Don’r let yourself deteriorate from a garden enthu-
siast to a garden quitter just because the middle of
July is past. It is only the shank of the season on
the soil. There is much to be done, not only to bring
the things already under way to perfect develop-
ment, but to begin from the beginning with entirely
new crops for the late fall harvest. Not even the
annual going away from home for the vacation of a
week, a fortnight or a month about this time of the
summer is sufficient justification for letting a good
garden go to the dogs ten weeks before its time. Get
the new crops started anyway, and hire a neighbour
or a neighbour’s boy to look after things at least
once a week while you are away, so that you will have
a little more than a fighting chance against the
weeds when you return and the fall supply of fresh
vegetables for the table will make the trivial expense
219
JULY—THE FOURTH WEEK
of the emergency caretaking seem as nothing at all.
The list of things that may be planted now is al-
most as long and enticing as that of May or June.
Several of the vegetables which were started at the
outset and have been eaten before this are to be
repeated by at least one more successional planting.
Others, untried so far this year, are going to furnish
not only food, but the renewed zest in the garden
which comes from each new enterprise. .
Don’t hold it against yourself if you feel a trifle
blasé by the middle of July so far as another plant-
ing of radishes or even peas or six-week beans is con-
cerned. Put them in again as a matter of course, as
a matter of houschold economy, and then turn your
attention to endive or spinach, for example, for the
real interest in the second half of the gardening sea-
son.
Before specializing for the week let us enumerate
the things on the general list that are still suitable
for planting: Early varieties of peas may go in for
the last planting any time within the next fortnight,
except in the extreme northern parts of the United
States. ‘There are three weeks safely left for bush
beans, also for lettuce. Early varieties of beets and
220
JULY—THE FOURTH WEEK
carrots will be on the planting list until the middle
of next month. Spinach, radishes and early turnips
may be planted as late as the last of August.
If the family has an appetite for sweet corn on the
cob that is not satisfied by the usual midsummer and
late summer crops try another row now of some very
early variety. If you have space it is well worth
taking the chance of bringing it through to maturity.
But on that particular vegetable there is no time to
lose. Take all the gardening rules you can find, and
for an average they will give you about the middle
of July as the latest date on which you can plant
corn. Deviation from rules by a week may be com-
mendable independence and garden courage ; by much
more than that is plain foolishness.
Kohl-rabi can be started now with fair show of
success, also another batch of small cucumbers for
pickling purposes. But the time limit on them
is the same as that for sweet corn. One year the
writer planted an extra-early variety of corn the
middle of July to see what would happen. It all
came through in good shape, with all the ears well
developed, and the first of it was eaten on the nine-
teenth of September. A guest that day was a neigh-
221
JULY—THE FOURTH WEEK
bour who had ridiculed corn planting in the middle
of July.
For the amateur who has not yet got the meaning
of all the terms of the garden and the seed store
clear in his head it may be helpful to explain that
the terms “early ” and “late,” as applied to dif-
ferent varieties of various vegetables, do not mean
that one is for planting early in the season and the
other late. The words simply indicate roughly the
length of time that a certain variety takes to come to
maturity after planting. “‘ Early ” means a shorter
and “late” a longer period of development. So
for late planting always select “ early ” varieties of
beets, carrots, corn or whatever else you are about to
put in the ground.
For the familiar vegetables of the early summer
planting, such as peas and beans, corn, lettuce and
the rest, apply the same methods of fertilization and
clean cultivation and earth mulching that served in
Apml and May and June. In some cases, particu-
larly with the new plants of lettuce and peas, extra
precautions are needed in July and August to protect
the growth from excessive heat. This is afforded
by placing muslin screens over the plants for several
22
JULY—THE FOURTH WEEK
hours during the extreme heat of the day. Of
course the required moisture must be provided, either
through the conservation process of frequent raking
of the surface or by judicious watering. Also re-
member that hot weather is always corn weather.
Now for some of the things not ordinarily tried in
the amateur garden, but which you should become
interested in and plant now. Endive is surely one
of them. If, as in the case of any other man, the
way to the gardener’s heart is through his stomach,
let the promise of a wonderful salad be made now.
It consists of lettuce and endive, with Roquefort
cheese dressing. Just one portion of that with your
own endive on your own table fifty or sixty days
hence will pay for all the trouble you may take in the
meantime to produce the vegetable. It is, in flavour
and crispness, one of the most distinctive things that
grow. It is a native of East India, but curiously
enough very hardy as to frost and easy to raise in
_ this country way into late fall. As a matter of
fact it makes its best growth in the cool weather at
the tail end of the season, just as peas thrive better
in April and May than in July and August.
Get the seed of the curled or fringed leaf rather
223
JULY—THE FOURTH WEEK
than the broad-leaved variety of endive, for it is
much better for blanching and keeping for winter
salads. Broad-leaved endive is better for greens and
soup flavourings, using the leaves themselves rather
than the stalks.
The best soil is a sandy loam. The planting may
be on the spot where the vegetable is to have all its
growth, or it may be planted in a seedbed and then
transferred to the permanent place. One way is
about as good as another. The slight advantage of
transplanting hardly pays for the trouble. By fol-
lowing the simpler method you have only to thin out
the plants to six-inch intervals. If they are trans-
ferred from a preliminary seedbed give them the
same six-inch spacing in transplanting. Seed should
be covered very thinly with earth, but placed close in
the drill to assure an ample supply of healthy plants
after thinning.
Thorough preparation of the soil before planting
is of great importance. Dig well to the depth of the
spade, clean off all the weeds and rubbish and then
make the surface as fine as possible by pulverizing
with hoe and rak-. If the soil is at all thin — that
is, lacking “n numus or decayed vegetable matter —
224
JULY—THE FOURTH WEEK
use barnyard manure for fertilizer. If the mechan-
ical condition of the soil is good a chemical fertilizer
will serve the purpose better than the manure, for
the plant food contained in it is released more quickly.
Quick growth for endive, as for lettuce, is essential
if it is to be at its best so far as crispness is con-
cerned. For that reason a supplementary fertilizing
with nitrate of soda, raked in between the rows after
growth begins, is urgently recommended, no matter
what material has been used for the preliminary en-
richment of the soil.
For that preliminary fertilizing here is an excel-
lent formula for chemicals for a patch containing
about four hundred square feet: ‘Three pounds of
nitrate of soda, eight pounds of bonemeal and two
pounds of muriate of potash. These quantities cost
very little. Buy them separately so to be sure of
what you are getting; mix them thoroughly with
the spade, and then work the mixture into the
ground. For the later fertilizing to produce quick
growth of leaf and stalk take three pounds more of
the nitrate of soda, by itself, and use it between the
rows.
If barnyard manure is used for the same area of
225
/
JULY—THE FOURTH WEEK
four hundred square feet instead of the chemical for-
mula two hundred pounds will be about right.
Blanching is as essential in the raising of endive
as with celery, otherwise the stalks are too bitter to
be palatable. The process, a very simple one, should
begin when the plants are about six inches high.
Exclusion of the light is the thing to be attained,
and the manner of doing it is of secondary import-
ance. The simplest method is to tie the tops of the
leaves together with yarn or raffia so that the out-
side leaves form a tight case about the heart of the
plant through which the light does not penetrate.
- Banking with earth, as in celery blanching, or cover-
ing with leaves or straw, or shielding from the light
by a tent-shaped contrivance of boards, will also do
the work. Whatever the method adopted, extreme
care should be taken not to tie up or cover when there
is any water or dew on the inside leaves and stalks.
If there is, the blanching process simply becomes a
rotting performance.
When real cold weather sets in remove the plants
from the garden, with some soil clinging to the roots
of each one, and place them close together in a cool,
cellar or in a protected outdoor trench, well covered.
226
JULY—THE FOURTH WEEK
In this way the supply of endive for salad may be
carried into the winter.
Spinach is another plant that originated in the hot
part of Asia but will grow here the year round with-
out winter-killing. It may be sowed in the United
States as late as the middle of September, will get a
start before freezing, live in the open ground all win-
ter if covered with four or five inches of straw, and
resume growth the first thing in spring, thus produc-
ing one of the earliest home-grown greens. But it
may also be planted now, in the latter part of July,
for use late in the fall, as it requires only about sev-
enty days to come to maturity and the early frosts
will not harm the developed plants.
Rich soil is required for a really satisfactory
growth of the proper size and greenness. Anything
that is spindling or that falls short of that very dark
green is not worth raising. Moisture is another es-
sential. Have the rows a foot and a half apart with
six-inch spaces between plants. Keep out all weeds,
and even after weed growth has stopped, if it ever
does, cultivate by shallow hoeing or raking for the
sake of keeping the moisture in the ground.
Everybody likes spinach, but many housewives
Q27
JULY—THE: FOURTH WEEE
hate to cook it because it has so much sand and grit
in it that it is a difficult thing to prepare. If your
wife happens to be one of those who have declared
they will not fuss with it any more ask her to give
you just one more chance. ‘Then, if she relents, try
the Norfolk or Bloomsdale varieties, which grow in
vase form, with broad, thick leaves that are sup-
ported on stout stalks and do not rest on the
ground. That is the point: they do not get full of
sand.
The best chemical formula for spinach for four
hundred square feet is: Three pounds of nitrate of
soda, ten pounds of bonemeal and two pounds of
muriate of potash.
Salsify, or oyster plant, to be used in the same
season, must be planted not later than the first of
June, because it is of slow growth, sometimes requir-
ing 160 days to come to maturity. But now is a
good time to put in a little salsify for next spring.
Like spinach, the salsify will get a good start in the
fall and live in the ground through the winter.
228
CHAPTER XXII
&
AUGUST-—THE FIRST WEEK
Tue fruit and vegetable garden is one more item that
may be added to the short but delightful list of the
things of this world that improve with age. It may
be made to class, on that score, with wine and good
books, cathedrals and century-old lawns of England.
_ It all depends on the gardener himself. And August
is an excellent time to begin to assure better results
for another year.
Get the idea of the garden as a continuous thing,
not as a food-producing patch that begins in the
spring and ends in the fall. With the adoption of
the permanent notion you are on the right road to
making your garden improve with age. You make
lasting improvements in soil structure and establish
a sinking fund in soil fertility to be of use in the
seasons to come.
For this immediate season go on with the cultiva-
229
AUGUST—THE FIRST WEEK
tion and the weeding and add fertilizer where it is
needed. But more care is required now of course
in the application of manures — chemical or natural
— than in the beginning, before planting. Other-
wise something may get burned up by the very plant
food that is given to enrich it. Liquid manure is
the best possible thing to apply now.
Fertilize the asparagus bed now if you failed to
do it at the proper time, immediately after the cut-
ting season was over. Next spring’s stalks of as-
paragus depend upon the food that the plants get
before winter. Manure put on in the spring does
little good to the crop of that same season. Spread
a hundred pounds of well-rotted manure on every
twenty-foot-square patch, or put the following mix-
ture on the same area and rake it in between the
rows: ‘Two pounds of nitrate of soda, six pounds
of bonemeal, and a pound and a half of muriate of
potash.
As a beginning for the permanent renovation pol-
icy select the poorest part of the garden and deter-
mine to make it the best part before you are through
with it. It can be done, perhaps, by dragging on
a lot of new and better top soil, or by ploughing
230
AUGUST—THE FIRST WEEK
under large quantities of manure. But there is a
surer way — one that is much more interesting and
more permanent in its results. There will be no need
of the new top soil, and the heavy manuring can be
done later.
This method is to sow in August a cover crop of
red clover, crimson clover or alfalfa. The three are
named in the order of the ease with which they are
raised. But the order of their benefit to the soil
is the reverse. That is, the alfalfa will do much
more good, if you can get it to grow, than the crim-
son clover, and this last is better than the ordinary
red clover. They are all three clovers and, there-_
fore, will all perform the very useful service of tak-
ing nitrogen from the air and storing it in the soil.
But the alfalfa has a tremendous root system and,
because of that, will add much more humus to the
soil that is to be improved, and, which is of vast im-
portance, these roots will break up and mellow the
soil for a great depth. 5
Don’t brush aside the idea of alfalfa as something
that belongs only to large farming operations.
Don’t ignore it simply because so much has been said
about the great difficulty of growing it except in
231
AUGUST—THE FIRST WEEK
certain favoured parts of the country. If you are
not much north of the forty-first parallel of latitude
it is worth while trying. Whether it fails or not
in your particular garden, it is a most interesting
experience and, in proportion, the soil benefits of a
successful crop will be as great on a hundred square
feet of garden soil as on a hundred acres of farm
land. .
Here is what the writer did with alfalfa in Mid-
dle Jersey, many hundreds of miles away from what
used to be considered the necessary soil and climate
conditions for this crop: His chief purpose was to
renovate an old, run-out hay meadow and get the
soil into better condition for a new peach orchard. —
~ There were a couple of quarts of seed left after the
major operation was completed, so he put them on
a piece of the garden, just for the fun of the thing,
to see what would happen. The crop was a success,
and a wonderfully improved section of that garden
was what came of the experiment.
Preparation for the alfalfa on the hay meadow be-
gan in April with ploughing, very thorough harrow-
ing and a planting to oats, which were cut late in
July. In the little garden section the space on
232
AUGUST—THE FIRST WEEK
which the alfalfa experiment was tried had been
planted to peas, six-week beans and lettuce through
the early part of the season. ‘The vines and other
débris were all cleaned off and then the methods in
the large field were all followed in miniature. Au-
gust thirteenth the garden patch, about thirty by
twenty-five feet, or 750 square feet, was ploughed;
spading would do as well on a small piece. Then
fifty pounds of lime was scattered evenly over the
surface and harrowed in. A sack of soil, weighing
about one hundred pounds, was scraped off the sur-
face of a near-by farmer’s field where there had been
alfalfa and scattered over the garden patch for pur- |
poses of inoculation. This is not necessary if you
inoculate the seed, which is a much easier matter.
The writer did both in this particular case.
Then that land was raked over and harrowed and
fined still further by hauling a drag of brush across
it until it was absolutely pulverized and level, as fine
a seedbed as could be made.
On August twentieth, just after sunset, the in-
oculated seed was sown, half of it by walking back
and forth north and south to scatter it and the other
half by walking east and west, to assure greater
233
AUGUST—THE FIRST WEEK
thoroughness and more evenness in covering the
ground. Then the seed was barely covered by a
very light raking. It is important to sow the seed
just after sunset or before sunrise, because the
strong light of the sun will destroy the efficacy of
the inoculating bacteria if they are exposed to it.
This business of inoculating the seed is about as
simple as boiling an egg. The United States fur-
nishes the bacteria free of charge and tells you all
about it. Write to the Department of Agriculture
at Washington and tell them what you want to do.
You will receive a small bottle of colourless liquid
and two tablets. All you have to do is to sterilize
a gallon of water by boiling it and put the bacteria
in. Wet the seed with the mixture and sow.
Four days after the seed was planted in the gar-
den and in the prospective peach orchard it was
up and the ground well covered. The plant got an
excellent start before freezing weather and came
through the winter in good shape. Late in the fall
it had been covered with a liberal coating of barn-
yard manure. In the spring it made a fine start, and
if it had been ploughed under then its benefit to the
land would have been worth while, but it was allowed
234
AUGUST—THE FIRST WEEK
to stand for two seasons in both the field and the
garden to get a better root growth. The first year
one crop was cut and the next year two, furnishing
most excellent food for hens. Then it was ploughed
under. ‘The result is that the renovated part of the
vegetable garden is now among the things that im-
prove with age.
Try a small patch yourself this August. If the
alfalfa experiment seems like too much of an under-
taking sow a little crimson clover anyway, unless
you are too far north. In that case make it red
clover. Begin permanent garden improvement now
and make it an annual plan.
235
CHAPTER XXIII
a
ATG gS TA E SyE OO ND) HW Bae a
As June and July were the ideal months for canning
the surplus products of the garden, so are August
and September the months for drying, pickling and
preserving the surplus of middle and late summer.
If you have not got a surplus your garden has
failed. Make a note of it as a guide for better plan-
ning next year. If you have only enough tomato
vines to supply the daily craving of the household
for the fresh fruits served as salad what are you go-
ing to do in the winter for chili sauce? Buy it, of
course. Poor stuff at high prices. Next June you
will know better and add a dozen or so plants to
your tomato patch if you enter the blunder on the
diary every gardener must keep.
The same with cucumbers needed for pickles, and
all the other products of the garden which by one or
more of the various conserving processes can be made
236
AUGUST—THE SECOND WEEK
to furnish a daily food supply for the family long
after the garden is covered with snow. Plant for
twelve months next time, and let the source of the
winter supply be fully provided for on the garden
map.
There are various reasons why we can early in
the season and pickle later. The tomato will serve
as an illustration. For canning purposes the big
ripe tomatoes are used and the jars are filled from
the surplus of the vines not demanded from meal to
meal on the table. At that stage of the gardening
season nobody likes to pick stuff green, and it is the '
green tomato that is used for pickling. Imperfect
fruits will also serve the purpose, although the slice
off the stem end should never be used. Making of
chili sauce is also an end-of-the-season performance
because the small fruits and the odds and ends of the
late crop are as good for this as the perfect speci-
mens.
Here is the recipe for chili sauce that has been
used in the writer’s family for three generations to
season the baked beans of New England and the
meats of the rest of the country:
Cook slowly, for an hour and a half, the follow-
237
AUGUST—THE SECOND WEEK
ing ingredients, stirring frequently to prevent burn-
ing: Ejighteen ripe tomatoes, two green peppers,
one onion, one tablespoonful each of salt, ground
clove, ground cinnamon, ground allspice, one cupful
of sugar, two cupfuls of vinegar.
Nothing that was ever poured out of a bottle
from the store could touch that mixture as a
relish. Of course the quantities can be increased as
long as the proportion is maintained. |
Here is about the best thing you or your wife can
do with sliced green tomatoes: Cover with one cup-
ful of salt and let stand for twenty-four hours one
peck of green tomatoes, sliced, twelve onions, sliced.
Pour off the brine and add: Six green peppers,
chopped, one cupful fine-cut horseradish, one and a
half pounds of sugar, a scant half teaspoonful of
cayenne pepper. Cover with two and a half quarts
of vinegar and boil until the tomatoes are tender
and the green becomes translucent in appearance.
Pack in jars with the vinegar. During the boiling
of the mixture the following seasonings should be
suspended in the kettle in a muslin or cheesecloth bag:
Two ounces each of cloves, whole cinnamon, allspice
and mustard seed. The idea of enclosing these
238
AUGUST—THE SECOND WEEK
things in a bag is to prevent the finished product of
the jars from being too dark in colour,
The best test of the strength of brine suitable for
pickling cucumbers is the newly laid egg. The brine
should be strong enough to float it. The test will
be surer if you keep hens than if you buy the
“strictly fresh ” at the store.
Make the brine by adding the required amount of
salt to boiling water. Then pour the brine over the
small pickle cucumbers after they have been packed
in stone or glass jars. Let them stand twenty-four
hours. Finally dry each one on a piece of cloth and
put them all in the jars in which they are to be kept.
For the pickling fluid for ten pounds of cucumbers
take two quarts of vinegar and six pounds of sugar
and boil, suspending in the mixture by means of the
cheesecloth bags the same seasonings that are used
in the pickling of green sliced tomatoes. When it
comes to a boil skim off any impurities and pour over
the cucumbers in the jars in which they are to be
sealed.
When the particular gardener who happens to
write these suggestions for his fellow gardeners
throughout the country happened to remark, while
239
AUGUST—THE SECOND WEEK
he was hoeing tomatoes one day, that he thought
he would write something about pickling, his wife
sniffed and said something to the effect that it was
a woman’s job. Then she jumped at the chance to
spread over the country her pet family rules, as
printed above, dictated them to the gardener and
examined his copy with great care to make sure that
no mere man with a hoe should give bad advice to
some trusting housewife.
Nine years ago the United States Government got
together from various sources rules for ten different
things that can be done with grapes. Then those
ten recipes were carefully buried in the middle of a,
very large, forbidding-looking book, called the An-
fatal Report of the Department of Agriculture for
1904, where the housewife is very sure never to find
them. But as you have or should have a grape ar-
bour near your garden, and as we are on the subject
of putting things up for winter, it is worth while
to drag forth these Government secrets. Here they
are: :
Cannep Grapes. Select fresh, firm, ripe ber-
ries, remove the stems, and can the same as other
fruit. The fruit of seedless varieties, such as the
240
AUGUST—THE SECOND WEEK
Thompson Seedless, is almost as good canned as when
it is picked fresh from the vine.
Grare Butter. This may be made of either
green or ripe grapes. If intended for a relish to
serve with meats the green grapes are to be pre-
ferred; or, if ripe grapes are used, a little sharp
cider is added. Pick the grapes from the stems, wash
well, and put into a granite kettle with just enough
water to keep from burning. When soft enough
press them through a sieve to remove the seeds. To
seven pounds of grapes, weighed before seeds are
removed, add a pint of sharp cider, and, if grapes
are ripe, two ounces of cinnamon and one of cloves.
Tie the spices up in muslin bags and remove when the
butter is made. Allow three and one-half pounds
of sugar to seven pounds of fruit, but do not add it
until the butter is quite thick., Boil it until it is of
the desired consistency. Some prefer adding lemon
juice instead of cider or vinegar; from half to two-
thirds of a cupful would make the given quantity of
grapes quite sharp. A pint of clear grape juice
added to the strained pulp makes the best butter of
all. | |
Grape Picxies. Take seven pounds of ripe
: 241
AUGUST—THE SECOND WEEK
grapes and remove the stems. Take three pounds
of white sugar, one quart of cider vinegar, one ounce
of cinnamon and half an ounce of cloves. Boil this
and pour over the fruit for two mornings; the third
morning put fruit and all into the preserving ket-
tle; heat so as to simmer for a few minutes, then put
it into glass or earthen jars, tie up securely and keep
in a cool place.
GRAPE JELLY. Select firm grapes, not quite ripe.
Wash the berries well, pour into the preserving ket-
tle and stew slowly for some minutes to free the juice.
Strain through a colander and then through a jelly
bag. Keep the juice as hot as possible. Measure
the juice and add one pound of loaf sugar to each
pint of juice. Boil fast, for at least thirty minutes,
until done, and put in glasses.
SpiceD Grapes. Take the pulp of the grapes, —
boil and rub through a sieve so as to get rid of the
seeds. Add the skins to the strained pulp and boil
with sugar, vinegar and spices, using for seven
pounds of grapes four and a half pounds of sugar
and one pint of good vinegar. Spice quite highly
with ground cloves, allspice and a little cinnamon.
Grape Marmatapre. Take one pound of grapes
242
AUGUST—THE SECOND WEEK
and one pound of sugar. Stew until well dissolved,
put through a strainer bowl and then through a sieve.
Cook until it becomes as stiff as jam. Put away in
small preserve jars.
Grape Leatuer. Use same ingredients as for
marmalade. Boil until quite stiff. Spread on mar-
ble slabs or china platters to dry.
Grapre TRIFLE. Pulp two pounds of ripe grapes
through a sieve fine enough to extract the seeds. Add
sugar to suit the taste. Put into a trifle dish, and
cover with whipped cream nicely flavoured. Serve
cold.
Grape JunxetT. Take two quarts of new milk,
warm it on the stove to about blood heat, pour into
a glass bowl; stir into it two tablespoonsfuls of pre-
pared rennet, two tablespoonfuls of powdered sugar,
half a small wineglassful of grape juice, and half a
wineglassful of grape brandy. Let it stand until
cold, and serve with sugar and cream.
Grape Pre. Take the pulp from the grapes and
heat a little to soften it; then rub through a sieve
to get out the seeds. Add the skins. Sugar to
taste and bake.
Drying fruit and vegetables to keep them through
243
AUGUST—THE SECOND WEEK
the winter is almost a lost art so far as the household
is concerned, partly because the drying can be done
better, with less loss of flavour, in specially con-
structed ovens run on a commercial scale, partly be-
cause of improvements in the process of home can-
ning by which nearly everything that grows can be
kept with much of its original palatable quality.
In these days nobody would think, for example, of
cutting up peaches and apples and placing the slices
on boards to dry out in the sun, as our great-grand-
mothers used to do.
Still, home drying has its limited uses. It is the
best process by which to keep Lima beans and shell
beans. Let them fully ripen on the vines, and when
they are so dry that the pods crackle under pres-
sure of the thumb shell them and put them in damp-
proof jars until needed.
If you canned from the early crop all the corn that
will be needed, dry a little of the late supply for the
sake of variety. Hang the ears, unhusked, to the at-
tic rafters just as you would in preserving the best
ears for seed purposes. When it is as dry as the
ordinary pop corn or fodder corn it may be baked
or boiled or parched.
244
AUGUST—THE SECOND WEEK
Drying, of course, is a very necessary process in
the proper keeping of one of the garden staples —
onions. They should be cured on the field if the
weather permits, and then stored for the winter where
three essential things can be assured — ventilation,
dryness and a non-freezing temperature. As soon
as the onions are pulled spread them on the ground
in the sun, covering them night and morning to keep
off dampness. Pick out all the imperfect thick
necks, the soft and immature ones, and throw out all
the loose skins, because these things themselves won’t
keep and may impair the perfect onions.
When thoroughly cured pack in crates made of
wooden slats far enough apart to assure circulation
of air, and then still further assure ventilation by
placing each crate on sticks so that there will be
plenty of open space beneath it.
In other words, use the same methods for keep-
ing your small quantity of home-grown onions for
the family table that the commercial grower uses.
It pays. The groceryman will give you the crate.
245
CHAPTER XXIV
a
AG Us TT BB TA B.D OW) Bee
Maxine a lawn should be the starting operation of
every gardener’s efforts to have his place in the
country or the suburb something worth while on the
score of looks. The best cultivated and most pro-
ductive garden back of the house will hardly excuse
a weedy, scraggly looking front yard. But, strange
as it may seem, the two things often are found to-
gether — the good garden and the poor lawn or no
lawn at all.
As a matter of fact the lawn should come first,
especially if you have moved out of town for the pur-
pose of getting more enjoyment out of life. To do
anything in the way of new trees, shrubberies or even
flowers before the grass plat is satisfactorily estab-
lished is as illogical as hanging the pictures before
the walls are papered or painted.
There is no better time for this lawn making than
246
“
Ss
AUGUST THE THIRD WEEK
YO
late August. Garden work is pretty well cleaned.
up. Now get at the grass and take plenty of time
to do the thing right the first time, to get a lawn
that will last for generations and improve in appear-
ance each year. We hear a lot about the wonderful
English lawns. One of the chief reasons why they
are wonderful is that they are many years old and
have never been neglected.
For the lawn seed go to the nearest reliable seeds-
man and tell him what your special conditions are as
to soil, the amount of shade and slopes. Nearly
every seedsman will tell you that his particular mix-
ture of lawn seed is the best. They are all very much
alike. But make some distinction in your buying
between grass for the wide open stretches and for the
places under trees where there is deep shade. There
are varieties of seed for both shade and the open, so
do not waste time and impair the future appearance
of the place by putting one sort of grass where an-
other sort would do much better. There are also
varieties of lawn grass with specially long roots.
Get one of these for any steep terrace there may be,
as it will withstand washing out much better.
Perhaps the best thing to do as a preliminary is to
Q47
AUGVUST—THE THIRD WEEK
go to the man who has the best-looking lawn in the
neighbourhood, whose soil conditions are the same as
yours, and ask him just how he did it, where he got
his seed and what kind.
If the lawn is to be the setting it should be for
the house it must fulfil three conditions: Refresh-
ing colour, pleasing contour and satisfying extent.
The greenness and velvety appearance of the grass
plat, of course, are due directly to the quality of the
seed used and to the preparation of the soil for it.
As already said the selection of the seed, with the ad-
vice of the neighbour or the dealer, is a simple mat-
ter, but the preparation of the soil is just as im-
portant —more so, if anything, and more compli-
cated.
Around suburban dwellings the real-estate dealer
usually looks after the establishment of something
that passes for a lawn in the eyes of the prospective
home buyer as one of the assets of the property.
The city man, lured from his apartments, can, at
the outset, look with delight upon the apparently
promising greensward on his newly acquired prem-
ises. He does not realise then that with the first
heat of summer his lawn will begin to burn up and
248
AUGUST—THE THIRD WEEK
that after a drought it will be an unsightly brown
patch, which before another season must be labour-
iously and perhaps expensively renewed if there is to
be any lawn at all the second year.
Grading and building operations and cellar dig-
ging for the house itself — with the consequent un-
avoidable bringing of more or less subsoil to the sur-
face and the littering of the ground with fragments
of bricks, mortar, splinters of wood and bits of
roofing tin and other building materials — make
the land about the house pretty poor lawn soil. The
mere taking off of the rubbish that has not been
buried a few inches underground, and the scattering
of some seed, may be sufficient under these conditions
to put a temporary covering of grass on the lot. for
real-estate advertismg purposes; but investigate
with a spade before you assure yourself that the work
of making the real lawn has not all been left for you.
If you build a house of your own see to it that the
grading is done right in the beginning.
To be ideal the lawn soil must have a good supply
of moisture always available for the grass roots.
It must even up its own needs by the ability to drain
off excess water in wet weather and to supply stored-_
249
AUGUST—THE THIRD WEEK
up moisture from underground during the long dry
spells. This quality in a lawn soil is far more im- ~
portant than the kind of seed sown or the choice of
a fertilizer. Once establish this proper balance of
moisture and all the other things necessary to that
lawn will be added unto it.
The other essentials, that will take care of them-
selves to a very large extent if the water supply and
the drainage are what they should be, are proper
bacterial activity, aération and oxidation, soil sani-
tation, and the supply of plant food. One can judge
from that list how vital this moisture-conserving soil
is in the making of a lawn. All of which leads up to
the question: What is the right texture of soil for
a good lawn? Should it be light or heavy, and how
should it be treated to make it right if it is not so at
the outset?
In general the light sandy soils, especially the
coarser ones, are undesirable for lawns. They do
not hold the water well enough. The heavier, clayey
soils or clay loams are much to be preferred.
These clay soils, however, are more difficult to
handle and also, as a rule, need plentiful liming to
keep them from becoming sour and a great amount
250
AUGUST—THE THIRD WEEK
of manure or other organic matter for humus to
loosen their compact texture. Still, the much bet-
ter lawn that can be made on such ground justifies
all the work of preparation.
If you could order this matter just to suit your-
self you would have a top soil of rich loam, with a
foundation of clay, not so impervious to water that
there could be no draining off in periods of excessive
moisture.
To do the very best thing with the ground you
have, clean off every scrap of rubbish and get rid of
the weeds. ‘Then spade or plough to the depth of at
least eight inches. If the place is big enough to
justify the use of the plough it will be well worth while
to follow it with a subsoil plough to break up the
ground to a greater depth and add to the precaution
against lack of both moisture and drainage. If the
soil is thin incorporate a generous supply of old
barnyard manure in it by spreading it on the surface
and then turning it under.
The next operation is with the rake on the small
place and the harrow on the big one. There cannot
be too much of this fining process. The more rak-
ings or harrowings the better. Hauling a drag of
251
j
AUGUST—THE THIRD WEEK
brush back and forth over the place will help, too,
and after that use a smoothing board and roll the
surface.
If at the beginning the soil has produced a crop
of the weed known as five-finger, or if it has patches
covered with a greenish, moss-like growth, that is a
pretty good sign that there is too much acid in the
ground for grass growing. Remedy that defect by
working in a couple of bushels of lime for an area
about twenty feet square. As a further precaution
do not neglect to test the soil for sourness by means
of the strip of blue litmus paper. Acidity is too
easily remedied to allow the continuance of it to
nullify all the operations of soil preparation and
enrichment. For immediately available plant food
to supplement the supply in the barnyard manure
that has been ploughed under — partly as fertilizer
but principally to loosen up the soil — here is the
best chemical formula for a lawn twenty feet
square: A mixture of one pound each of nitrate of
soda, bone meal, acid phosphate and muriate of
potash.
After the soil has been deeply dug, amply enriched
and thoroughly pulverized on the surface, sow the
252
AUGUST—THE THIRD WEEK
seed. Let it be honestly cleaned and recleaned seed
that is guaranteed, for the lawn is to be for all time.
The mistakes in its construction are not like those in
the vegetable garden — for a season only — and one
mistake to be guarded against is getting seed that
is full of weed possibilities.
Sow two quarts of the seed mixture for every
twenty-by-twenty-foot area. It is best to sow one
quart while walking back and forth north and south
and the other quart while going east and west.
That assures a more thorough and even distribution
of the seed. ey to do the planting just before a
shower.
After sowing go over the plat again with a rake
or light harrow to make sure that every seed is
covered, and then roll to compact and smooth the
surface. With such thorough preparation of the
soil and care in the selection of honest seed of the
varieties best adapted to the needs of your particular
place you should get a good start on your grass be-
fore growth stops for the winter and by next sum-
mer there will be a lawn that is a lawn. <A coating
of barnyard manure spread on the surface for the
winter and raked off in the spring will be a great
253
AUGUST—THE THIRD WEEK
help. It will be an added protection against winter-
killing in a severe season, and the plant food from
the manure that will leach into the soil with snow
and rain water will increase the richness of the
ground.
In the spring the surface must be thoroughly
rolled again to counteract the loosening effect of the
heaving of the soil that comes with the alternate
thawing and freezing which mark the end of winter
and the approach of the mud season. Without this
spring rolling the lawn will become lumpy and uneven
and much of the grass will be apt to die because of
exposure of the roots. Cutting next spring should
begin when the grass is about two inches high. It
should be kept at about that height by weekly cut-
ting throughout the summer. That is short enough
for looks and grass shorter than that on the ordi-
nary lawn is apt to suffer from exposure of roots
to the sun.
Do not rake off the cuttings. Allow them to rot
on the surface and gradually become a benefit to
the soil by giving back to it the plant food that they
have used. Do not mow during periods of long-con-
tinued drought unless you can furnish an ample sup-
254
AUGUST—THE THIRD WEEK
ply of water for the grass by means of hose or
sprinklers.
Perhaps you already have a lawn that is pretty
good on the whole, but bad in spots— not bad
enough to justify the digging up of the whole thing
for a new start, but enough of a defect to make you
feel a trifle apologetic when a caller comes round
to look at your vegetable garden and flowers. In
that case first learn what the trouble is. If it is
too much shade get the seed adapted for such a spot.
Test for acidity.
Maybe the soil at that particular spot was not pre-
pared properly at the outset. When the trouble is
understocd apply the remedy, even to the extent of
digging up the particular place that has made a
bad showing and treating it as if you were making
an entire new lawn, regrading and adding new soil.
Keep the lawn a lawn after taking all the neces-
sary pains to get it. Don’t chop it up with need-
less paths and fancy flower beds. True landscape
work consists of a lawn that suggests spaciousness
and of trees and shrubs and flowers to mark the bor-
ders or form groups in the corners, to form a vista
or conceal an undesirable outlook.
255
AUGUST—THE THIRD WEEK
So far as possible give to the lawn or even the
suburban grass plat the effect of extended area. See
to it that necessary paths are enough lower than the
general level to be invisible a few feet away, so they
will not break the green expanse as you look across.
And let the general contour of the lawn be convex
— never concave—a gentle slope from house to
road in proportion to the distance between the two.
256
(CILA PUP RORY CA.
&
AUGUS T—-—THE, EOQURTH, WEEE
Looxine ahead for a period of years, plus considera-
tion of the four seasons of every one of those years,
is an essential preliminary to the planting of vines
and shrubs and evergreens about your house and
grounds, if such planting is to be permanently sat-
isfactory. It is not a case of sticking something
into the ground that will serve its purpose of pro-
ducing food or blossoms within a few months and
then be over with, never to be repeated in that par-
ticular spot if it has been a failure.
Permanent planting is as important as getting
the house itself right. So don’t jump at con-
clusions. Don’t plant a particular bush or tree
for no better reason than that somebody else has
done it. Don’t plant a particular shrub that you
know is beautiful in the spring, until you know what
it looks like in the fall and winter. Perhaps some-
257
AUGUST—THE FOURTH WEEK
thing else, just as beautiful in the spring, has the
added advantage of displaying wonderful scarlet ber-
ries all winter or a remarkable foliage that is worth
while in itself, independently of the early blossoms.
If there are no trees and shrubs about the place
when you take possession that is, in a way, an ad-
vantage. What you miss in shade and appearance
for the first year or so is offset by the fact that you
have a clean slate to begin with; that you can create
your own surroundings; that you can make your
place, for years to come, the expression of your own
ideas and those of the family. It should be a family
affair anyway. The members of the household
should constitute a sort of home Department of
Parks, with the man or woman best fitted for the
job acting as commissioner, to carry out the agreed-
upon plan.
Get a map of the place, front and back, in your
head and sketch it on a sheet of paper. Sketch it
many times. Get your distances as firmly. fixed in
your mind as the alphabet is — if you went to school
in the days when the alphabet was of some account.
Visualize every nook and corner of the grounds as
you see them from the road, from the back steps,
258
AUGUST—THE FOURTH WEEK
from the front porch, from this and that window;
as they look when the ground is covered with snow,
when. the buds are swelling, when the autumn col-
ouring is at its height.
Go into the woods and the fields, in all four sea-
sons, to look over the goods that Nature has to offer
free of charge if you will dig them up and take them
home; and consider this source of supply as well as
the cultivated rows of the nurseryman before mak-
ing the final decisions and purchases.
You can, for example, buy a pretty good dog-
wood tree from the commercial grower for two or
three dollars, but you can get one just as good from
the edge of the woods for nothing, and it means more
to you after you have got it. Every season there-
after, when that dogwood blossoms, you will tell how
you went out into the woods and dug that tree your-
self. As you get old your children and grandchil-
dren will sit round on the porch spring evenings,
watching the level, flower-laden branches of the dog-
wood tree that look like shafts of moonlight against
the dark background of the evergreen foliage, and
wait for your annual story, knowing that it is sure
to come. In the course of years, cither with your
259
AUGUST—THE FOURTH WEEK
own telling or with the handing of the story down by
the next generation, a dangerous snake will glide
into that tale, or a terrific tempest, with the tree
right next to the dogwood struck by lightning while
you were at work, and everybody will believe it. So
the place will have a tradition as well as a tree —
and every family should have traditions.
But mere planning and dreaming about the mat-
ter will not plant the trees and shrubs. There is a
digging period as well. If the place is hilly don’t be
too eager to level away every knoll there is for the
sake of getting the conventional flat lawn, with
hedges round the border and shrubberies in the
corners. The very unevenness of the ground, if
treated properly, may develop into one of the chief
sources of its charm and attractiveness. That is
one of the problems you must solve for yourself be--
fore the final adoption of your plan.
Trees that are to grow large, like the pines, must
not be crowded. If the upper branches finally come
in contact one of the trees is going to suffer, per-
haps die. Neither should such a tree be placed
where it will eventually touch a building or reach
too close to it. That would mean the dying out of
260
AUGUST—THE FOURTH WEEK
the tree on the side toward the house. If such a
tree is to live on for generations and be a greater
ornamental asset each year it must have a wide area,
preferably a lawn, that it will eventually shade and
dominate.
The proper business of the vine is not only to be
beautiful itself but to hide something that is not
beautiful, no matter how useful and necessary it
may be. It is time enough to make pergolas and
other supports of vines, if you really want them,
after a good start has been made in trailing the ivy
or Virginia creeper or wistaria over the barn and
woodshed and such other service buildings as there
may be on the premises.
For the general layout of the grounds there are
two things to consider broadly, each of them sub-
ject to many subdivisions. These are the utilities
and the esthetic things. Under the first head come
your path and roadways, the tennis court and
croquet ground, the vegetable and flower gardens
and, for the sake of appearances throughout the
country, it would do no harm to include the space
for that homely but necessary business of hanging
out the week’s wash.
261
AUGUST—THE FOURTH WEEK
Let the clothes yard be a close-cut lawn, for the
sake of cleanliness, and then inclose it with a high
hedge or a continuous arbour covered with a vine.
The community as well as the family should be con-
sidered in the laying out of a place. When Arnold
Bennett was being shown about this country one of
the things that struck him was the very general
clothes-line display. To express his opinion of it
he parodied a line from a famous poem and spoke of
“the short and simple flannels of the poor.”
Paths and roadways should be direct and take
up no more space than is necessary to serve as a
means of getting somewhere. Don’t curve a path
merely for the sake of having it curve. If you are
set on having something other than the short, straight
line, put a tree or a bush in that line so there will
be a real excuse for having the path make a turn
from its natural course.
Privacy out-of-doors is another thing to be
sought in the planning, and that arrangement of
the hedges and shrubberies should be such that
there is at least one space where the family can en-
joy the delight of a meal in the open air without
the passing public’s having to know, in spite ‘of it-
262
AUGUST—THE FOURTH WEEK
self, whether the roast beef is rare or well done,
whether the small boy of the household has or has not
yet acquired good table manners, and whether the
old man can carve a chicken without looking things
that he ought not to say, either in the house or out
of it.
Under the head of the wsthetic comes the general
ornamental effect of the whole plantation, as seen
from the road and the house, and the quality of each
separate shrub and tree to satisfy your love of and
interest in leaves and flowers and bark. Both of
these requirements are to be fulfilled by the right se-
lections, and there are countless combinations that
will do it.
Here is one such combination that would fill a
space of from 225 to 250 square feet, without special
references to the shape of the plat. It may be round,
square, rectangular or, best of all, somewhat irreg-
ular. The general rule in this group planting of
shrubs and small trees for mass effect is to de-
termine approximately the number of plants by di-
viding the total number of square feet by 12 or 15.
That would give about sixteen separate pieces for
the area:
263
AUGUST—THE FOURTH WEEK
One forsythia bush One spirzea Thunbergii
Two golden philadelphi One dogwood
One laurus benzoin One English hawthorn
Three plants of the bush One viburnum dentatum
honeysuckle of different One viburnum tomentosum
colors of foliage One weigela, Eva Rathke
One spirea Van Houttei Two tamarisks
Such a combination would give white, yellow, pink
and crimson in the flower colours. It would pro-
vide for bright berries in the winter and a fine show
of foliage between flowering time and the falling of
the leaves, and there are some attractive barks in
the collection. There are other groupings that
would give a more gorgeous colour show for a small
fraction of the year, but that is not all there is to
the permanent shrubbery planting. The flower gar-
dens are for colour primarily. The other things
are for winter as well as summer.
All of the plants in the above list may be set out ©
in late September or in October or early next spring
any time, in fact, when the plants themselves are
dormant and the ground is workable.
The soil should be prepared for them with as much
care as you would prepare the ground for the vege-
table or flower garden. For thoroughness the ideal
way 1s to spade the required area to a depth of three
264
AUGUST—THE FOURTH WEEK
feet. If the soil is good to that depth it can all go_
back with a liberal supply of barnyard manure in-
corporated in it. If it is not good it will pay in
the end to put in good ground from some other part
of the place. One-sixth of the total mass put back
after the spading ought to be manure. To save
time this may be put in in two or three layers, but
it is better to work it all through the soil. Such
preparation is going to store up a supply of rich
plant food for a long time to come, immediately
available for the roots. The digging up of the
place, instead of merely making holes for the sep-
arate plants, is going to assure good tilth that will
conserve moisture and give the plants the very best
of conditions under which to get a good start.
Supplementary fertilizing will be needed, of course,
every year and this is best obtained by mulching
the ground late in the fall with a heavy coating of
manure and digging it in the spring. Cultivation
is also necessary through the growing season, just
as it is in the ordinary garden. And the annual
care must include careful pruning. Remember that
the only time to prune a flowering shrub is imme-
diately after its blossoming period is over. Also re-
member not to cut out the berry-bearing parts.
265
CHAPTER XXVI
&
SEPTEMBER
WueEn to pick the fruit, and what to do with it to
get the greatest good from it for the longest time,
are two of the problems incidental to the fruit gar-
den almost as important as the matters of planting, .
cultivating, pruning and spraying. To do all the
preliminary things as they should be done, and then
to impair the flavour and keeping qualities of the
crop by not knowing one or two little tricks of the
harvesting and preserving, is unfortunate. Yet it
frequently happens. Of course for immediate use
— for eating as you stand under the tree or vine
entertaining a friend and showing off your garden,
or for fresh fruit at the table—the obvious rule
to pick when just ripe needs no setting forth.
But that is only part of the game. If the fruit
garden is anything of a success it will produce enough
to last over for the following year if properly put up.
266
SEPTEMBER
So the rules are necessary. Grapes, for example,
should be picked when not more than three-quarters
ripe for one purpose, when fully ripe for another, be-
cause of chemical changes that come with the develop-
ment of the fruit. Pears may be kept for weeks,
sometimes until Christmas, in their natural form as
fresh fruit if they are handled right, and this without
loss of flavour.
To accomplish this pick the pears when they are
firm and of good colour, but long before they are
ripe enough to eat. Wipe each one clean and dry
and wrap separately in pieces of oiled paper. Then
put them away in a dark, dry, cool place; and you
will have fresh pears to eat for a long time before it
is necessary to open the first jar of those that you
have preserved or pickled. |
September sees the close of the greater part of the
season’s canning, pickling and preserving. Grapes,
late blackberries, pears, peaches and quinces com-
plete the list of fruits other than the ever-useful
apple. It is the apple that saves the situation when
other fruits are a failure, for with sweet apples
pickled after the rule of our grandmothers’ apple
butter, and a stock of canned apple sauce, together
267
SEPTEMBER
with a winter’s supply of Baldwins or other good
keepers in the cellar, there is no reason why the family
should not have an ample and wholesome fruit ad-
dition to its diet all through cold weather. If you
happen to be raising your first pig for your own
roast pork you will, of course, not make the almost
criminal mistake of not having your own apple
sauce to go with it.
Then there is the homemade cider to drink and for
the pies, also the cider jelly to go with cold meats,
as useful by-products of the tree or trees, When
there is an off-year with the fruit be sure to save
the windfalls. They are just as good for cider and
for apple sauce as hand-picked fruit.
The later peaches, which are not so mellow or full
flavoured as the early ones, are best spiced. The
same is true of many varieties of coarse-fibred,
rather insipid pears. The pears must be peeled, but
6
the peaches need only have the “ wool” thoroughly
wiped off. The following pickling rule is equally
good for peaches, pears, quinces, blackberries or
sweet apples:
7 pounds of fruit
4 pounds of granulated sugar .
268
SEPTEMBER
1144 cups vinegar — dilute if very sharp
1144 ounces whole cinnamon
4, ounce clove; or one clove stuck into each fruit
The spices should be sewed into a muslin bag and
suspended in the kettle to prevent too great darken-
ing of the syrup. Put the vinegar and sugar and
spices on to boil until the sugar is dissolved to form
the syrup. Then add the fruit and after it has boiled
up well draw back on the range and allow to simmer
slowly until the fruit is thoroughly cooked. It will
be tender and finely seasoned, the flavour of course
growing richer the longer the fruit remains in the
spiced syrup.
The old way was to keep these spiced fruits in
stone crocks, but it is better to keep them in glass
quart jars which hold the right amount for a family’s
use. This does away with the continual stirring
over of the fruit every time it is taken from a crock
and the consequent broken pieces caused by many
handlings.
Here is a recipe for peach marmalade that is worth
trying: Pare and cut the fruit. To every pound
of peaches add three-quarters of a pound of sugar.
Put the fruit and sugar into a porcelain-lined kettle
269
SEPTEMBER )
and let it come to a boil. Then draw the kettle to
a cooler part of the stove and add the juice and
shredded pulp of a medium-sized, very ripe pineapple
and the juice of two lemons. These quantities are
enough for a twelve-quart kettle of fruit. Cook this
several hours until it becomes a thick, pulpy mar-
malade, taking special care that it does not burn.
Pack the mixture in glass jars and seal them with
paraffin.
For grape jelly the following rule has been used
with great success for four generations in at least
one family: Pick the grapes when they are about
three-quarters ripe. Stem and wash them and put
into a granite kettle. As the fruit heats crush it
with a wooden potato masher. Boil the crushed fruit
gently for half an hour and then pour the whole —
juice, skins and pulps — into a cheesecloth bag of
double thickness which has been moistened in cold
water. Let the juice drain through the mesh of the
cloth overnight into a kettle. Measure it in the
morning and for every pint of grape juice allow a
pound of granulated sugar. Put the sugar in gran-
ite pans, place in a moderate oven until thoroughly
heated. Meanwhile put the juice in the kettle over
270
SEPTEMBER
the fire and boil for twenty minutes. Then add the
sugar gradually, stirring it as it goes in to quicken
the process of dissolving. Let the sweetened juice
boil up again and then skim it. For a test take out
a teaspoonful and chill it on ice to see if it “ jells.”
The less the mixture cooks after adding the sugar the
better the jelly will be in colour and flavour; so as
soon as it shows a tendency to thicken on the ice turn
it quickly into the chilled jelly tumblers. Cover
them with clean paper until the jelly hardens, then
seal with paraffin.
The reason unripe fruit is required for the jelly is
found in the pectin, a carbohydrate somewhat similar
in its properties to starch and found in all fruits. It
is the pectin that makes the juice stiffen into jelly
when equal quantities of the juice and sugar are
boiled together. This pectin is most active before
the fruit is ripe. It loses its power of gelatin-
izing with complete ripeness or if the juice and
sugar are allowed to ferment or are cooked too
long.
Another point to remember with reference to this
pectin is that grapes and other fruits to be used in
jelly making should not be picked immediately after
271 '
SEPTEMBER
a rain, for they absorb much water which dissolves
the pectin before it has a chance to do the work of
hardening the product. For the same reason any
necessary washing of the fruit should be done as
quickly and with as little water as possible before
the jelly making begins.
Putting up jelly is not such a risky or painstaking
job as the canning of fruits or vegetables, because
jelly is so rich in sugar that it is practically immune
to bacteria and yeasts. But it must be well pro-
tected against the spores of mould and against evap-
oration. Here are different ways of accomplishing
the same thing: Prepare rounds of thick white
paper, the size of the top of the glass, and dip them
in brandy or alcohol. Also brush over the top of the
jelly itself, as soon as it is hardened in the glass, with
alcohol or brandy and then cover with the dipped
paper circles. If there are no metal or glass covers
for the jelly tumblers cut another set of paper circles
with the diameter half an inch larger than those of
the tops of the glasses, so they will overlap all round
and admit of being pasted down to the sides of the
glass. To get the paste beat up the white of an
egg to which has been added a tablespoonful of cold
272
*
SEPTEMBER
water. Another way is to dip the paper covers in
olive oil and then tie them on to the glasses.
The paper dipped in alcohol really makes a safer
cover than paraffin, because the alcohol destroys any
mould spores that may be on the jelly when it is put
up. If they happened to be there when paraffin
covers were put on they would simply develop under
the casing and spoil the whole jar. Of course there
is no objection to taking the double precaution of
having brandy-soaked paper on the jelly and the
paraffin over that. If paraffin is used alone let the
coating be at least a quarter of an inch thick, for
as it cools it contracts and if the layer is too thin
it will crack and expose the surface of the jelly.
STORING OF ROOT CROPS.
Whether or not the first cost of fixing the cellar
so that it is suitable for the storing of vegetables
is more than offset within the first winter by the
saving on the household food expense account de-
pends, of course, upon the amount of carpentering
or masonry work that must be done and upon how
many vegetables the family uses between growing
seasons,
273
SEPTEMBER
That it will pay, and pay well, in dollars and cents
in the long run to raise in your own garden enough
vegetables and fruit for the entire year and to have
a satisfactory place for the storing of the root crops,
the celery, cabbage and apples, there is no question.
It pays from the very outset in the immense satis-
faction in being a real producer, even if the consumers
of the product are limited to the circle about your
own dinner table. It means a greater abundance
of vegetables and fruit, a much greater variety, and
far and away better quality than when everything is
bought.
That patch of ground back of the house becomes
much more than a place for exercise and diversion
or a source of summer and autumn table delicacies.
It remains all of that and becomes, in addition, a
very real factor in the cost of real living.
There are three essentials for the successful stor-
ing of fruits and vegetables— dryness, good ventila-
tion and the temperature best suited to the particular
thing stored. Unfortunately the same tempera-
ture is not the best for all things. If it were the
problem would be simpler. Sweet potatoes, for in-
stance, should be kept in a dry, comparatively warm
Q7 4
SEPTEMBER
room, with a temperature of between fifty-five and
sixty degrees — about the same amount of warmth
required for the raising of mushrooms. But that,
of course, is altogether too warm for the white po-
tato or any of the other root crops.
On the other hand, good winter-keeping apples of
the thick-skinned varieties will do well in a tempera-
ture a trifle below freezing. Northern-grown, hardy
apples — the Spitzenburgh, for example — may be
frozen hard without material harm if they are kept
frozen till they are wanted and then thawed very
gradually.
It is between these extremes of the sweet potato
and the very hardy apple that the safe average
temperature for nearly everything is found. The
ideal would be just above freezing, but if you can
maintain an average of anywhere between thirty-two
and forty degrees you have an excellent storage place
so far as temperature is concerned. But it must be
dry, too, and have good ventilation.
After providing these three requirements there is
another thing fully as important — the quality and
condition of the product that is to be stored. It
should be sorted out and selected with as much care,
275
SEPTEMBER
as much rigid: rejection of the imperfect, as you
would exercise in making up an exhibit of fruit or
vegetables for showing at your county fair or in
filling a gift basket for a friend. Not a single fruit
or vegetable that is bruised or soft or cut or in the
least affected by plant disease should be given place
in the storage quarters, for one imperfect piece may
cause the spoiling of the whole lot.
Possibly your cellar is all right as it is to answer
the purpose, or can be made so with very little tink-
ering. Such a simple thing as wrapping with as-
bestos the steam or hot-air or hot-water pipes be-
tween the top of the furnace and where they go
through the cellar ceiling may be all that is necessary
to reduce the cellar temperature to the required de-
gree, and incidentally to give you more heat upstairs.
Or the desired results may be obtained by nothing
more expensive and elaborate than a cloth screen or
a partition of light wood to separate the section
chosen for the vegetables from the furnace and coal
bins.
Onions are perhaps hardest to keep successfully
through the winter. The manner of harvesting is of
great importance. The onions must be _ pulled
276
SEPTEMBER
promptly as soon as they mature — that is, as soon
as most of the tops begin to wither and turn yellow.
Onions in the same row vary more or less in the time
of maturing, but a few green ones will not matter.
The onions from three or four rows may be heaped
together in a windrow to cure for a week or ten or
twelve days.
If one is reasonably sure of clear, dry weather
the onions are best left right on the ground, where
the curing process may be hastened by occasional
gentle stirring with a wooden rake. Be sure that
the stirring is gentle and the rake a wooden one, for
the slightest bruising of the bulbs, especially of the
white varieties, causes them to decay rapidly and
the most careful storing will not save them. Thor-
ough curing prevents sprouting, and careful han-
dling prevents decay, so these two precautions are
essential.
It is best to top the bulbs when ready to store, leav-
ing about an inch of the stem. The ordinary cellar is,
as a rule, too moist for the safe keeping of onions.
Bins or boxes in a frost-proof shed or barn, or a dry
loft, should prove satisfactory. The temperature
must never drop to freezing, but on the other hand
277
SEPTEMBER
it should never rise more than two or three degrees
above it. On bright days, when it is not too cold,
the windows should be opened for ventilation, care
being taken never to let the sun strike directly on the
bins where the onions are stored.
In the matter of onions you may get one of the best
hints from the commercial packages in the stores.
The vegetables are packed in crates of light wood
strips that afford ample ventilation. There is no
better way of putting up the supply from the home
garden. When the crates are put into the storage
room raise them from the floor of the bin and separate
them from each other by blocks of wood placed
under the ends so that the circulation of dry air may
be through the bottom of the crate as well as through
the sides.
With the cellar temperature and ventilation what it
should be, there is no better way for the successful
keeping of the potato crop than to spread the tubers
out in the bottom of a wooden bin, raised a foot or
two from the floor. ‘The thinner they are spread the
better, the ideal condition being to have no potato
touch another. Twelve bushels ——a good winter
supply for a family of four moderate potato eaters
278
SEPTEMBER
—— may be stored in comparatively small space, and
as the quantity diminishes the lot may be spread out
thinner.
If your crop of celery is small, and you expect it
to last only through the late fall, it will be necessary
only to heap the earth round the base of the plants
in the garden, leaving them thus exposed until real
danger of hard frost. Celery will stand very cold,
frosty weather without coming to harm, but once it
actually freezes its flavour is spoiled.
When freezing weather is at hand the earth must
be heaped closely up to the very tops of the plants,
until it almost covers them, and as the days he-
come even more severe this ridge of banked celery
should be well covered with coarse straw or stable
manure held in place by boards or stakes. Do not
use decaying leaves for banking or let any manure
come in contact with the stalks, for celery readily
absorbs odours that are present in the storage place,
and its edible qualities may thus be ruined.
Another way of storing celery out-of-doors is that
known as trenching. A narrow, shallow trench is
dug, and as soon as there is danger of heavy frost
the celery is dug and placed with the roots bunched
279
SEPTEMBER
close together in this trench, the sides of which should
be inclosed with two parallel rows of blanching
boards. 'The earth is now heaped up on both sides
and a covering of boards or straw put on over the
whole.
Where celery is kept out-of-doors the natural cir-
culation of air through the trench from end to end
should be regulated with reference to the wind and
outdoor temperature. On warm days both ends of
the trench should be opened. On days of extreme
cold both ends should be closed with straw and earth.
On moderate days the end opposite that from which
the wind is blowing should be opened.
If the cellar is cool and dry you may safely ven-
ture to store your winter’s celery supply there. The
temperature, however, must be very low and the ven-
tilation good if you expect satisfactory results.
When using the cellar for storage take up the plants
with most of the roots attached and set them in
a deep bed of moist sand.
Cabbage and turnips should not be kept in the house
cellar for the reason that they are liable to decay and
become offensive, if not even dangerous to the family
health. The winter’s supply of these two vegetables
280
SEPTEMBER
can best be kept in boxes half buried in the garden.
Choose compact, perfect heads of cabbage, and handle
with care to avoid bruising. In the same way choose
the firmest and most perfect of the hardy turnips,
and then take pains to keep their surfaces unbroken.
The storage boxes should be sunk fully half their
depth in a dry part of the garden, and then the bot-
toms of the boxes covered with some six inches of dry
earth, on which the vegetables are placed heads down
and covered with from six to ten inches of soil. This
covering is put on lightly at first to avoid heating,
and may remain so until severe weather is at hand.
Then a good covering of straw or coarse manure
should be added.
With a little more digging the boxes or barrels
may be eliminated from the cabbage-storing arrange-
ment and this vegetable carried in safety through the
winter by the trench system alone. Make the trench
three feet deep, which in any ordinary winter will be
safe, store the cabbage heads in it and then mound
up with earth, covering the whole with straw, held
in place by boards, as an extra precaution.
Beets, carrots, parsnips and oyster plant may
be easily kept in a cool, dry cellar if packed care-
281
SEPTEMBER
fully in boxes of sand. ‘They must be handled care-
fully, only perfect ones saved, and then placed so
that the roots do not touch.
Squash must be kept in a dry place where one
can be sure of a uniform temperature of about fifty
degrees, and even the squash with its thick skin must
not be handled roughly.
282
CHAPTER XXVII
&
SEPTEMBERE—CONTINUED
Wuewn you think you have made good-and sensible
use of every part of your ground, so far as the
permanent layout is concerned, think again. The
chances are that you will find place for another grape-
vine, perhaps for half a dozen, thus adding both to
your crop total and to the general appearance of
the entire place. The grapevine, well cared for, is
beautiful as well as fruitful. But for it to be both
there must be a compromise scheme of give and take
between the fruit on the one hand and the wood and
leaf on the other.
That is a point to remember in planning for the
grapevine planting. If an arbour is wanted to fur-
nish shade, or if the vine is intended to serve as an
arch the length of a walk or as a screen against a
wall or to form a summer house with walls and ceil-
ing of broad green leaves, the grape will serve any
283
SEPTEMBER
or all of these purposes, but it will not produce much
in the way of full-grown clusters of well-developed
berries. Its fruits will be incidental — thin, scraggly
bunches, hanging here and there from the top of
the arbour, furnishing enough fruit, perhaps, when
all is gathered, to help out on the jelly making, but
not much to look at as fresh-gathered for the table.
That is one extreme — the maximum of shade and
the minimum of fruit. But if there is plenty of
room a yard should assuredly have some such grape
arbour because of its attractiveness.
The other extreme is the scientifically pruned and
trained vine, with its canes cut off and cut back with
reference only to the best results in the size and
weight of the fruit clusters. Several such vines as
this must be on every place if the owner makes any
pretensions to being the grower of his own fruits and
vegetables. They are more important than arbours
and have the first call on the room space if there is
not enough for both.
But the sort of vine we had in mind at the outset
was something in the way of a compromise — an ex-
tra piece put in here and there as a filler when the
ground seems to be filled up but really isn’t. There
284
SEPTEMBER
is room for one, no doubt, in some awkward corner
where it will serve its ornamental purpose and still
admit of enough annual restraint on its wood growth
to furnish some good fruit too.
Another vine will make an excellent screen to blot
out, or at least blur, the too conspicuous view of some-
thing unsightly on your own or your neighbour’s
land — a chicken coop, for example, made out of an
old piano box which an amateur poultryman has neg-
lected to paint.
In the vegetable garden itself a string of vines can
be put along the western edge, where they will not
rob other things of the morning sun, at eight-foot
- intervals. A vine or two on the eastern border will
not do any harm if the placing of the vegetable plants
is regulated accordingly. The friendly shade of a
grapevine has often saved a bed of lettuce or a patch
of green peas from the July sun.
That there are about two hundred different in-
sect pests that prey upon the grapevine, take it the
world over, is more than offset in the United States
by the fact that the worst of those pests are found
only in the grape-growing regions of the Mediter-
ranean countries, that the insects prevalent in this
285
SEPTEMBER
country are easily controlled, that the vine responds
more readily than other fruit-bearing plants to good
care and generous food supply, and that it will grow
almost anywhere.
There are two very simple methods by which you
may increase your number of vines from those you
already have or from some favourite variety of a
neighbour. Neither way costs more than a very little
trouble. One method is to reproduce from cuttings;
the other is by layering.
Cuttings may be made this fall, as soon as the vines
become dormant. Or the preliminary work can be
done early in the spring. Better do it this fall.
There will be a thousand and one other things to at-
tend to in the garden as soon as the new season starts.
Furthermore the bulk of opinion on the part of the
big vineyard growers is in favour of fall cutting.
The writer has’ vines started from cuttings taken
from the parent plant at both seasons, and the fall-
cutting productions seem more thrifty.
A grape cutting is a length of well-matured last
season’s new wood. A piece eight or ten inches long
is about right. Select medium-sized wood with short
joints. Make a slanting cut just below the bottom
286
SEPTEMBER
bud or eye of the piece removed and then trim off
the upper end, leaving an inch of wood above the up-
per eye. It will help to have a small piece of the old
wood left on the lower end. If the cuttings are made
this fall they may be tied together in a bundle and
kept in cool, moist sand in the cellar through the
winter. Or they may be planted outdoors this sea-
son at any time before the ground freezes, but it is
safer to postpone the outdoor planting until spring.
An excellent trick of the commercial grower, which
you may adopt to advantage, is to put the cuttings
in the ground but ends up when you trench them
temporarily. This causes the root ends to callus,
while the tops remain dormant. Then when they are
planted in spring the throwing out of roots begins
immediately and gets ahead of the top growth. If
this precaution is not taken the tops are apt to begin
their growth before there is sufficient root.
When the cuttings are finally set in the ground
in which they are to have their first year growth they
should be put in right end up and planted so deep
that only the top bud is aboveground. Ground
should be well prepared and made mellow to a depth
of fourteen inches and then frequently cultivated
287
'
SEPTEMBER
throughout the first season to assure conservation of
moisture. Six-inch intervals between the new vines
are sufficient. After their first year as independent
plants they will be transferred to the place where
they are needed in your scheme.
There is a variation of this plan, called the short-
cutting method, which requires more pains but which
some authorities claim produces better vines. One
of the short-cutting advocates is Prof. S. T. May-
nard, of the department of horticulture in the Massa-
chusetts College of Agriculture. The short cutting,
he says, should consist of a single bud, with only two
or three inches of wood. It must be rooted in sand
by the aid of artificial heat. Make the cuttings in
winter and put them into boxes of sand one or two
inches apart. Furnish heat in the bottom of the
box by a layer of fermenting stable manure, or else
get the same result by placing the box on hot-water
or steam pipes. The desired temperature of the soil
in the box is from fifty to sixty degrees, says Prof.
Maynard, and that of the surrounding air should
be from forty to forty-five degrees. When well
rooted the cuttings are transplanted to other boxes
or, if the danger of frost is,over, to the open ground.
288
SEPTEMBER
Layering may also be done this fall or in the spring.
It is the easiest possible way of getting a lot of new
vines from an old one and it will succeed with more
varieties of the grape than the cutting method.
Select a long cane of last year’s new wood, starting
near the base of the trunk of the vine. Dig a trench
two inches deep from the stem in the direction the
cane grows and as long as that cane happens to be.
Then bend the cane over and pin it down in that
trench for its entire length. About every bud on
that cane will produce an upward-growing shoot.
As soon as the shoot starts fill in the trench with soil,
and then for every shoot a root growth will start
downward, producing a whole string of new grape
plants, all getting nourishment from the layered cane
like a litter of pigs from a sow, as well as from their
own new roots and tops. When the growth is well
started the layer is cut between each two new plants,
and the young vines are taken up separately and
transplanted.
A man with a good grapevine from which he wants
to raise many others, either for himself or to sell or
give away, can look ahead a season or two, and by
letting a new shoot grow until it becomes next year’s
289
SEPTEMBER
cane he will have the source of another string of vines
from the desirable stock.
Supplement the reading of these paragraphs on
cuttings and layering right now by going out for a
look at the nearest grapevine. The difference be-
tween this year’s shoots and the canes, which were
shoots last year, and of the arms and trunk of the
vine will be very obvious. So also will be the matter
of eyes or buds and the suitable location of canes for
layering purposes.
Successful grafting for grapes is a difficult matter,
much more so than for the tree fruits; and with the
two simple and practically sure methods of cutting
and layering at your disposal the only excuse for
adopting the third way of propagation is the com- —
mendable one of wanting to try all the experiments
that are possible in your garden.
For grafting purposes the scion should be well-
ripened, short-jointed wood of medium diameter. If
any time elapses between the cutting of the scion and
the operation of grafting it should be kept in a cool
place where there will be no danger of its drying out.
Three or four weeks before the union is made cut
off the stock two inches above the point where the
290
SEPTEMBER
graft is to be made so it may bleed thoroughly. The
next step is to cut off the stock near the surface of
the ground — a trifle below the surface if it is desired
that the grafted part put out roots of its own.
Make a cleft in the smooth-cut surface, cut the
lower end of the scion to a smooth wedge, even slants
on both sides, and then insert it in the cleft, pushing
the wedge down until the bottom bud is just above
the cut-off surface of the stock. The principal thing
to look out for is that the inner bark of the scion is in
contact with the inner bark of the stock. As the scion
is smaller than the wood into which it is grafted, two
scions may be put into the same cleft, one on either
side, so that each will get the absolutely essential
bark contact. The principal reason for inserting
two scions is that you double your chances of success
in an operation that is by no means sure. Wax the
cut and cover the entire thing with earth as a
further protection. This grafting may be done in
the fall.
Professor Maynard would make the cut on the stock
below the surface, use no wax, but cover the opera-
tion with soil up to the top bud of the scion, and
place over that earth a flower pot. Above the flower
291
SEPTEMBER
pot he puts more earth, a foot of it, and then covers
that with litter. This is to prevent the ground about
the graft from freezing. The flower pot is merely
a protection against rough handling of the scion in
the spring when the outer covering of earth and litter
is pulled off. A single bud, he says, grafted in this
way on a stock less than three-quarters of an inch
in diameter, made a growth of two canes, each more
than eight feet long, in its first season. Good fruit
may be expected the second year.
To make a very effective chemical fertilizer for
eight grapevines take one pound of nitrate of soda,
six pounds of bone meal and fifteen pounds of wood
ashes; mix them thoroughly and then work into the
soil around the plants for a distance of four feet.
292
CHAPTER SAV ILL
a
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
Ocroser is no month for loafing in the flower garden.
What with taking up the tender bulbs to save them
from winter killing and putting out the hardy bulbs
to assure early flowering in spring, there is much im-
portant and interesting work to be done away into
next month. The time limit for effective work de-
pends of course upon the date of the first hard frost
for the region in which the garden is located.
Not only are hardy bulbs to be put in the ground,
but practically all the herbaceous plants may now be
set out to advantage. This applies to the perennials
—the larkspurs, for example, or the sunflowers, the
anemones, and practically all the old-fashioned plants.
The tops of all of them will die down with the first
/
severe frost, but the roots will make growth all winter,
except in the occasional intervals of extreme cold,
293
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
and will be ready for an early and thrifty start at
the very outset of spring. To leave the preliminary
work till spring means that you will then have to
wait till the ground is sufficiently dried out to work,
and a very material delay in the getting of blossoms
will be the result. !
Work with roses offers the exception to the rule,
although some of the hybrid perpetuals may be set
out before frost; but even with these it is better to
wait until spring.
Some of the bulbs must be removed from the ground
as soon as their tops die down with the first touch
of frost — notably the gladioli, the dahlias, the can-
nas and the tuberous-rooted begonias. These things
are as tender as oranges and the bulbs will stand no
frost whatever. They should be taken up and packed
away for the winter in dry, clean sand, in the cellar, —
where there is no risk of their freezing.
The montbretia may be left in the ground except
in the northern parts of the United States, but it
should be protected with a covering mulch of straw.
Of course in the Southern states the gladioli and
dahlias will live in the ground throughout the year
if heavily mulched, but even here it is better to take
294
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
them up so they may have the complete rest of a
dormant period.
Bulbs to be put out this month and next are the
tulips and the hyacinths, the daffodils, jonquils, and
the various other narcissi, and the snowdrops, cro-
cuses, and bulbous-rooted irises. Inasmuch as all
these will live in the winter in the open ground they
would also survive through the summer, so the ama-
teur gardener may naturally ask why take them up
at all, thus adding to the garden work by removing
bulbs in early summer after their flowering period
_and restoring them to the ground in the fall. The
answer, so far as the tulips and hyacinths are: con-
cerned, is that they need a rest. Without taking
up and transplanting they would be of little use
after the first year. At best they make a poor show-
ing after the second or third season, even when re-
moved and put back each season, so the bulbs of these
two particular plants should be replaced with new
ones after three years if the quality and brilliancy
of the beds are to be maintained.
In spite of this comparatively short life of the tu-
lips and hyacinths there are probably hundreds of
these plants put out the country over as against
295
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
dozens of the narcissi, which improve year after year
the longer they are grown. Furthermore the nar-
cissi do better if left in the ground undisturbed
throughout the twelve months. The only reason for
taking them up is to make room for annuals and to
provide for rearranging of the spring beds,
Like the tulips, the Spanish and English irises
need frequent renewing. The herbaceous iris in-
creases in quantity and improves in quality as
the years go on, and it is not necessary to take it
up.
Evenness as to depth of planting and uniformity
of type in the same group are the prime essentials
in making satisfactory beds of tulips and hyacinths,
whether they are in borders or more formal designs.
In the first place let the soil be well prepared and
thoroughly enriched with manure. It should be -
spaded up for a depth of a foot, made fine through-
out that distance, and freed of all rubbish and small
stones which would interfere with the placing of each
bulb just where it ought tc be to produce its part
in the effect.
A continuous display from the earliest to the lat-
est possible flowering date of the tulip is what you
296
¢
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
want, and the successive groups which fill up the
season must be made up of plants of the same height.
Tulip growing has been reduced almost to a mathe-
matical science, so the exact size wanted is to be had
for the asking.
Unless you know all the ins and outs of the mat-
ter from long personal experience or with the as-
sistance of an accurately kept personal diary, the
proper selection of the tulip varieties is a simple
matter of catalogue reference and consultation with
an honest dealer. In this way you will get in one
group the eight-inch tulips, in another the ten-inch,
in another the plants that lift their flowers a foot
above the ground. Again you will have in one group
the early flowering types, to be followed in their re-
spective weeks by the late-flowering Cottage, Darwin
and Dragon varieties. After these come most of the
double flowers.
Plant the tulip bulbs about four inches under-
ground. Bury the iris bulbs about one and a half
times their own depth. Just cover the hyacinth
bulbs — not much deeper in the ground than you
would put onion sets — with their points just show-
ing. The iris is a weak-stemmed thing and should
297
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
be put among other plants that will help hold it up
when it begins to make its spring growth.
None of these bulbs should come in direct contact
with barnyard manure. If possible have your
stratum of the enriched soil just below the level at
which you place the bulbs. If this requires too much
time and trouble, or if the whole soil is filled with
manure after your enrichment of the garden through-
out the summer, you must take the precaution to
place in the bottom and round the sides of each
hole a little clean sand or loam as a protection.
Be sure to avoid manure as a mulch for the hya-
cinth, because if it rests upon the crowns of this
plant it will cause decay. In this whole matter of
winter mulching there is danger of overdoing. Ex-
cept in periods of extreme cold the natural soil tem-
perature of the season is best for nearly all the
varieties of tulip and hyacinth. At most they need
only a slight covering of straw or leaves. One ex-
ception to this rule is the Mariposa tulip. This and
all the anemones and the midsummer flowering mont-
bretia should have good protection.
One more warning against using manure as a
winter cover: It should not be placed over such her-
298
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
baceous plants as the foxglove, Canterbury bells,
and the madonna lily; it would surely rot them.
Root division is the method by which the peony is
multiplied. Split up the old large root this fall and
plant the parts not deeper than one or two inches. A
very common mistake is to set the peony too deep.
‘This is a plant that can be heavily mulched with
manure, not for winter protection, because it does
not need that, but to enrich the soil, which it does
need regularly.
This rule to split up the root clumps and set the
parts in different places as soon as the plants have
done flowering also applies to the autumn-blooming
asters, the phlox, chrysanthemums, and practically
all the herbaceous perennials. It may retard the
blooming of the peony in the first season after the
root division is made, but it is necessary neverthe-
less. With the other plants the improvement in
flowering will show the very next year after the
splitting up of the big clump. Phlox roots should
be divided every third year anyway, as soon as frost
has killed off the tops, if they are to be at their best.
The three graces of the autumn flower garden are
the dahlia, the aster and the chrysanthemum. The
289
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
first two require rich soil in which to thrive; the
last is content with somewhat ordinary ground.
Each of these plants needs plenty of room for its
individual growth. It seems a mistake to force these
particular flowers, as some gardeners do, to obtain
early blooms. The more desirable method is to re-
move the early buds and pinch back the blossoms,
thus reserving their rich colours for the late garden.
bed when other flowers have gone by.
The dahlia and aster will need some protection as
the frosty nights draw near, but the chrysanthemum
will endure a greater degree of cold, and if you are
so fortunate as to have some of the little, old-fash-
ioned * button ” chrysanthemums they will be bloom-
ing bravely even when snow flies.
When frost has actually nipped the tops of the
dahlias let the plants remain in the ground another
week, then dig up the tubers, dry them, and put
them away in a place that is airy and cool, but also
dark and dry. In such storage they will keep in
the best condition for next spring’s division and re-
planting.
Any flowering plants that one has been keeping
in sunken pots in the garden, pinching off the buds
300
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
as they appear so as to reserve the strength for winter
blossoms indoors, are better off out of doors until
actually threatened by freezing. But all bulbs, such
as tuberoses, cannas and gladioli, must be out of the
ground and safely stored before freezing weather.
It remains now for the gardener to do his fall clean-
ing, raking off old stocks, digging and raking the
border, which will save valuable time next spring.
Roses and tender vines must be protected by wrap-
pings of straw; the newly planted bulb beds should
have a blanket of litter or leaves sufficient to keep
out all frost.
October and November are also full months in the
business of pruning hedges and the autumn-flower-
ing shrubs. The rose of Sharon, whether used as a
hedge or ornamental bush, should be pruned in the
fall after it has finished blooming. Shortly after
flowering is over these plants begin to form new wood,
and it is upon this new wood that the next season’s
- blooms will appear.
Hedge and shrub pruning is based upon the prin-
ciple that the plants must be allowed all possible
_ time between blooming periods; hence the gardener
watches closely for his earliest opportunity to prune
301
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
as soon as the blossoms are gone, so there may be
practically a year of new growth before the next
‘season.. Of course this principle applies to spring
as well as to fall shrubs; for instance the forsythia,
which is such an early bloomer that it must be pruned
as soon as the blossoms fall, so it may have until
the next spring to stock up with new wood upon
which to hang its golden bells. No reactionary
tactics will work in shrub pruning. It is off with
the old and on with the new if you want blooms next
season.
Incidentally this pruning, which should be a little
each year and not a heavy hacking of the plants to
make up for time lost in previous seasons, is needed
to keep the plants in symmetrical form. The trim
clipping of the privet hedge is perhaps our most com-
mon example; but to apply such a system of pruning
to flower shrubs, set singly or in border groups, is _
a mistake. The sight of a syringa bush, for ex-
ample, sheared bare on its lower branches, while its
top spreads out broad with an expanse of blossoms
too high for our plane of vision, is the worst kind of
a garden blunder; and if your groups of weigelas,
deutzias and the other favourites are too much
302
OCTOBER AND NOVEMBER
crowded in the corner allotted to them, it is far more
satisfactory to thin them out by digging some up,
even if you must sacrifice them bodily, than to at-
tempt to remedy the situation by pruning the bushes
low down and getting thereby a display of bare and
ragged stems.
CHAPTER XXIX
Be
INDOOR WORK
Wir the same sort and quality of plants growing
in the same kind of soil, under similar conditions as
to temperature and light ventilation, two persons
may have very different results. This difference
seems to be more true of plants growing in the house
during the winter than of things in the outdoor gar-
den. Perhaps it is due to the fact that the success
of the enterprise indoors depends more upon arti-
ficial aids and less upon natural conditions. The
personal equation enters into the thing, and failure
is often expressed by the familiar remark, ‘I can’t
make plants grow for me no matter how hard I try
or how much attention I give them.”
Try it again this year. It is time now to get
ready for the inside gardening, by which interest
in a garden may be carried right through to next
spring, without any cold-weather break.
304
INDOOR WORK
There is a double source of supply of plants for
the house — those that you remove from the garden
and put into pots and the new plants you raise from
slips or cuttings taken from the parent growths.
It is well to avail yourself of both in order to get a
more continuous supply of blossoms. The young
geranium, for example, which has been out in the
garden all summer and has been pinched back to save
its flowering energy, should be potted; its flowers
will be among the first to add to the colour of the
room. For flowers late in the winter depend upon
the plants that may be formed now by rooting slips.
The same rules apply not only to that old house
favourite, the geranium, but to nearly all the indoor
lants.
For cuttings or propagation by slips the methods
are very simple, differing between the soft-stemmed
plants and the woody ones in only a few details and
in the length of time required for getting roots.
For propagating the herbaceous or soft-stemmed
plants, such as carnations, chrysanthemums, gera-
niums, fuchsias and begonias the slips may be made
from the stem or the leaves. The stem is much
surer and it is hardly worth while to try the leaves
305
INDOOR WORK
except for the sake of an interesting experiment with
the begonias. The thick and fleshy begonia leaf is
sure to form roots when the stem of that leaf is in-
serted in fine, clean sand or gravel and kept moist.
Sand should also be used for the stem cuttings
rather than garden soil, which is likely to cake when ,
subjected to indoor conditions, and is also liable
to be supplied with worm and insect life that will
be roused into activity by the warmth of the room
and prey upon the slips.
Select the cuttings with reference to their hard-
ness, choosing stems that break easily rather than
older, tougher parts of the plant which merely bend.
The younger growth will not only take root more
quickly in the wet sand, but will throw out much finer
and more pliable roots, with a capacity for absorbing
more moisture and plant food. The cutting should.
be taken off just below a bud or eye of the main plant,
because a new root system develops more surely at
one of the joints in the stem structure. Most of the
leaf growth should be removed from the herbaceous
slip, as it simply adds to the area from which the
moisture can evaporate, and thus increases wilting.
Such easy-going and easy-growing plants as gera-
306
INDOOR WORK
niums, fuchsias and verbenas will strike root in a
week. Carnations may take a fortnight or more,
while a month is a fair allowance for the more woody
specimens, such as roses and azaleas.
Two inches of sand in a dish is all that is neces-
sary for starting the slips. Place this in your sun-
niest window and keep the sand thoroughly wet every
day. As soon as a stem takes root and thus be-
comes a complete plant transfer it to a small pot for
individual treatment, taking care always. to coddle
it a little for the first few days by protecting it from
the direct sun and allowing it extra water.
The second method to get plants for the house is
to transfer them bodily from the open ground to
the pots in which they are to pass the winter. Re-
move the garden soil from the roots as carefully as
possible, so as not to tear the fine root hairs. It
is better that the soil for the winter growth should
be a fresh supply rather than that from the garden.
The best potting soil is a combination of one-third
well-rotted barnyard manure and two-thirds clean
loam. The two parts should be thoroughly mixed,
and if the whole is well pulverized by being run
through a coarse sieve so much the better for the
307
INDOOR WORK
plants. Place a layer of broken flower-pot frag-
ments in the bottom of the pot to provide drainage;
and it is a good thing to cover these bits of porous
clay with a thin layer of excelsior to prevent the
earth from working down into the crevices and clog-
ging the drain.
Each plant should have a pot to fit it — that is,
there should be a margin of an inch and a half or
_two inches between the bottom and sides of the pot
and the roots. This will give ample room for the
root system to develop, without allowing it to strag-
gle too far at the expense of the growth of the plant
above ground.
When first set in their pots all plants should have
a good watering. Afterwards this part of the treat-
ment should be given with care. Too much moisture
is as bad as too little, as it will rot the roots. A
dry surface is not always a sure indication of the
condition of the soil below. The expert can tell by
the sound when he taps the outside of the pot with
a stick, and perhaps you can get the knack by prac-
tising for a while on earth-filled pots that you
know are moist all through and on others that are
dry.
308
INDOOR WORK
A day temperature of from seventy to eighty de-
grees, with a night temperature about fifteen de-
grees cooler, is the ideal condition for practically all
plants grown in the house.
The chief pests will be the small green aphis and
the tiny red spider. Get rid of the aphis by sprin-
kling the plants with snuff or tobacco dust or by
watering them with a solution of tobacco leaves and
stems. You are almost sure to have the aphis, but
it is easily controlled. The presence of the red
spider means that the atmosphere is too dry.
Remedy that by wetting down all the foliage, and
then prevent further trouble from the same source
by keeping open pans of water in the room to pro-
vide moisture by evaporation. ‘The spider will live
only where it is very dry.
If the soil in which the plants are first potted is
of the right sort they will seldom need added fer-
tilizer in the course of the winter. But if they make
poor growth, or if the leaves are not a good healthy
green, the needed plant food can best be added in
the form of liquid manure. Get this by suspending
a bag of cow manure in a tub of water overnight.
The water will make a sufficiently rich dressing. Or
309
INDOOR WORK
you may topdress by working into the surface of
the soil a very little bonemeal.
Avoid drafts and do not move the plants about.
Plan your indoor layout with reference to the best
available location for each variety, giving the ferns
the shadier places, and then adhere to the plan. A
plant is a creature of fixed habits and it resents be-
ing moved from a spot where it is thriving merely to
satisfy the whim of its owner.
The better success you have this winter with the
indoor venture the better gardener you will be next
summer out in the big patch, for you will learn many
things that you don’t dream of now. There is more
time to study the growth of things close at hand.
Much less time is required for the drudgery of weed-
ing and keeping things cleaned up. You don’t have
to stoop over to examine this or that peculiarity of
a leaf or stem or blossom. You have no worry
about too much or too little rain, for that is all
regulated, just as you can fix the temperature by the
simple device of covering the plants with news-
papers at night or regulating the furnace damper
to suit them. Note the habits of growth, where the
new leaf or blossom comes with regard to the other
310
INDOOR WORK
parts of the plant, and keep account of the time
that each part of the development requires.
Lessons for this window-garden laboratory need
not be confined entirely to things that are grown to
look at. Try a little forcing of some fruit or vege-
‘ table; perhaps not enough for a real meal, but just
for a bite and for the satisfaction of proving that
you can do it. A tomato vine is within the possi-
bilities, and a head or two of lettuce can be grown
in the shadier part of the window garden, near the
ferns. If you have a section of the porch glassed in
and some means of heating the enclosure you might
produce a melon.
Strawberry forcing is interesting winter work for
the amateur. Take good plants from your own bed
or get the right sort from the seedsman, telling him
what you hope to accomplish. Put them into six-
inch pots with a good rich mixture, one-third of
which is old manure. In the beginning they should
have a night temperature not higher than forty-five
degrees and not much more than that by day. After
the first fortnight the plants may have a higher
temperature, and when they begin to blossom they
may have about the same conditions as those best
311
INDOOR WORK
adapted to the flowering of the geranium, with ample
sunlight.
Remember that many strawberry plants are pis-
tillate — that is, without stamens and pollen and
therefore incapable of producing fruit unless grown
within fertilizmg distance of bisexual plants. So
be sure to get a variety that has complete flowers,
with both the male and female parts. Even then it
will be necessary to do the work of pollination arti-
ficially, for there are no birds or insects and no wind
in the house to assure the transportation of the pol-
len from the stamens to the pistils. This can be
done with the aid of a fine camel’s-hair brush.
This matter of pollination opens up all sorts of
possibilities for the amateur in the way of cross
breeding and producing new varieties. Try an ex-
periment with carnations. They are about the -
easiest thing for the beginner to work with and the
results come within a year after the experiment is
made.
Here is a simple problem offered just by way of
illustration: Suppose you have some white carna-
tions and some red ones. Bag the flowers that you
select to work with or else move the plants far
312
INDOOR WORK
enough apart so that there will be no danger of
their cross breeding even in the house. Select the
most perfect plants of the two colours that you have,
taking into consideration height and stockiness of
the stems, condition of the leaves and shape as well
as size and colour of the blossoms. With keen, fine-
pointed scissors cut off all the stamens of the white
blossom, taking care not to jar off any of the pollen.
Then brush the pollen from the stamens of the red
flower on to a watch crystal and from that remove it
with the camel’s-hair brush to the pistil of the white
flower. Now reverse the process with another pair
of white and red flowers, transferring the pollen of
the white to the red, after cutting out the stamens
of the latter. Nature will do the rest of the work.
Let the two flowers go to seed. Plant the seed, care-
fully marking the two groups, and in eight or ten
months you will have flowers on the new plants.
RHUBARB AND MUSHROOMS.
Rhubarb is the food plant most easily fooled into
doing something out of season. In fact it is taken
in by a trick of temperature so readily that it almost
seems a shame to take advantage of its simplicity
313
INDOOR WORK
and you ought to blush next January when you are
eating pie made from your own fresh stalks. So,
without advising or urging it, we shall simply tell
how the shameful trick may be done. Just put the
rhubarb down cellar and keep it dark and it will
never know the difference, but will give you as juicy
and palatable a crop this winter as you may ex-
pect next spring from rhubarb which is treated
fairly and allowed to stay out-of-doors and follow
Nature’s course. |
The only difference is that the deceived rhubarb
will not have quite so much colour as that which
leads a normal life out in the wind and sunshine.
Dig up the rhubarb roots just before the ground
freezes too hard for you to remove them without
tearing, but expose those roots till they do freeze.
Then put them down cellar in slightly moist earth >
and they will immediately begin to throw up shoots
of pie plant. Just that overnight freezing, after the
digging, has completely fooled the roots into think-
ing that they have passed a long winter of rest and
comfort in the open garden and that it must be time
to resume work. Complete darkness in the cellar is
necessary to keep up the delusion. If the basement
314
INDOOR WORK
is a light one simply put the roots, with the soil, in
the bottoms of barrels and cover the barrels. Of
course the temperature of the cellar must be about
that of the open air in April and May.
Speaking of cellars naturally suggests the matter
of mushrooms. The mushroom resembles the hen’s
egg more than any other thing that grows in the
earth, in that it is counted before it is hatched, that
the mere thought of growing it provokes optimistic
dreams of sure and big and profitable crops. The
home gardener who doubts his ability to grow pota-
toes — even the amateur who 1s skeptical as to suc-
cess with so simple a thing as a radish — takes it for
granted that all he needs is a brick of spawn and a
box of dirt in his cellar to get an abundance of mush-
rooms. He multiplies a prospective yield by the
highest price per pound in the market report and
gets for his product a daily supply of mushrooms for
the family plus a small fortune in the first winter.
But mushroom beds do sometimes fail to produce
anything. There are three main causes of failure
— poor spawn, too much or too little moisture, and
the wrong temperature. Avoid all these usual stum-
bling blocks and follow instructions in the making of
315
INDOOR WORK
the bed and the chances are fairly good that you will
get mushrooms — say a pound to every square foot
of your bed — between the time of your first gather-
ing and the final exhaustion of the bed. Half a
pound of mushrooms sautéed and served on toast
makes a good meal for a family of three persons, so
a bed four feet wide and ten feet long, or forty
square feet, may be expected to be a real factor in
the producing of wholesome, palatable food when an
outdoor garden is frozen stiff.
Mushrooms will grow in a temperature of from
forty-five to sixty-five degrees. They will do their
best between fifty and fifty-eight degrees. In mak-
ing the bed you must depart from the familiar out-
door rule to have well-rotted manure, and get fresh
horse manure from the stable. If there is plenty of
straw in it so much the better. Mix this manure with -
earth taken from under sod which is itself free from
manure and therefore free from the spores of poi-
‘ssonous toadstools. ‘The proportion should be about
four-fifths manure to one-fifth soil. Mix the two
thoroughly and fork the whole mass over three or
four times a week for a month to prevent excessive
heating or fermentation. During its preparation the
316
INDOOR WORK
compost should be kept under sashes away from the
rain.
When the material has been thus prepared take
it down cellar and make the bed by spreading suc-
cessive layers of the compost over the entire area
which the bed is to occupy. A layer of not more
than two inches should be put on at a time, and
beaten down with the back of a spade before the
next is applied. The total depth should be about a
foot.
Careful account of the temperature of the new
bed is to be kept from the outset by sticking the
bulb of a thermometer down into the mass and leav-
ing it where it can be read frequently. Within the
first three or four days the heat from the closely
packed manure should register a hundred degrees,
possibly a little more. Then it will begin to decline,
and when the thermometer registers eighty-five or
ninety degrees it is time to put in the spawn.
Undoubtedly you will get this spawn from your
seedsman in the form of a brick. Break it up into
two-inch pieces and force them down into the com-
post about six inches apart each way and two or
three inches below the surface. It is much easier
317
INDOOR WORK
to use a stick or dibble for making the holes in which
to plant them. Cover each piece and firm the com-
post on top of it, leaving the surface of the whole
bed as smooth as before planting.
For the next eight or ten days Nature has to be
left alone and a very interesting process goes on
throughout the bed. This spawn, or mycelium, is a
thread-like growth developed from mushroom spores
or that powdery substance found on the gills under-
neath the mushroom cap. It is made up into bricks
with compost and kept cool and dry until sold for
reproduction. As soon as the pieces of this brick
are again brought under the influence of the growing
conditions of the compost they begin to develop
and spread, or “run the bed,” as the saying is.
This process requires nearly a fortnight. When it
is completed you take a hand again in the operation
and “‘ case” the bed. This consists of covering it
with an inch and a half of good clean loam that is
barely moist. For casing avoid both heavy clay soil
and one that is thin and sandy. It is worth while
to screen the loam before putting it on, to get rid of
all stones and rubbish that might interfere with the
straight and easy upward growth of the mushrooms.
318
INDOOR WORK
Up to this time very little if any watering has
been needed. That of course must be left to in-
dividual judgment. If the surface seems at any time
to be too dry or dusty moisten it very slightly with a
gentle spray. When the mushrooms begin to ap-
pear the bed will require more water and should
have a light sprinkling once or twice a week. But
no mushroom bed should ever be heavily watered.
Probably more mushrooms grown by amateurs are
killed off by rot and black spot, due to excessive
moisture, than by any other cause. The sprinkling
should be done whenever necessary immediately after
the pulling of the matured mushrooms.
After the bed is in full bearing the mushrooms
must be picked at least every other day — daily if
there is a sufficient quantity for the day’s use or if
the bed is crowded. If they come up too thick it
is well to pick even the buttons, as the small mush-
rooms are called, before the edges of the cap break
away from the ring that holds it to the stem and
spread out. Of course, the buttons are edible; some
persons prefer them to the full-grown article. A
mushroom gains practically nothing in weight after
the cap breaks from the ring. |
319
INDOOR WORK
A perfectly good bed may be ruined or materially
impaired for further productiveness by careless gath-
ering. Each mushroom must be taken by the cap
and stem and gently twisted until it comes out with
the least possible disturbance of the soil. Other-
wise some of the mycelium from which more mush-
rooms are to come will be torn and destroyed. Fill
all holes left after gathering.
The life of a bed is very uncertain. It may last
anywhere from five weeks to three months. When it
ceases to produce that is the end of it so far as
mushrooms are concerned, and it will be a waste of
time to try and renew it with another brick of spawn.
The compost itself is exhausted and must be cleaned
out entirely to get rid of any insects or fungi that
might injure a new bed made in the same place.
The soil and manure of the discarded bed will
make excellent fertilizer for the vegetable or flower
garden in the spring.
Insect pests in the mushroom bed are not serious.
They may be easily eliminated by putting arsenic
or Paris green on bits of potato or cabbage leaves
and leaving the poisoned bait beside the bed.
There are various other things you may do in
320
INDOOR WORK
your cellar in the course of the winter if you are
sufficiently forehanded to provide yourself with a
good working supply of loam under cover before the
ground gets too full of frost. For example you may
start early lettuce and tomato plants if there is a
window in the cellar wall high enough to afford a
supply of sunlight that will Bsc saniae + the heat
from the furnace.
Seeds will start in boxes near the furnace or on
top of it, if it is encased with brick, without the in-
fluence of the sunlight, but they will be yellow, spin-
dling, worthless things. If the window is there start
these plants by all means, and then transfer them
to a hotbed outdoors in early spring.
If there is any room in that cellar after making
the mushroom bed, hiding the rhubarb roots, and
storing the winter supply of summer-grown crops,
be sure to have a work bench. Every gardener
should be also a carpenter. There are many things
necessary in the garden that add a great deal to the
cost of it when bought at the stores, but which
can be made for little or nothing if you will pro-
vide yourself with a serviceable bench, a box of good
tools, and a little lumber. Trellises can be made
321
INDOOR WORK
ready for the tomato plants, label stakes can be
fashioned out of old shingles, tools can be repaired.
All the side boarding and the uprights for hot-
beds and cold frames can be cut and fitted in the cel-
lar workshop, and the chances are that they will be
much better made in a leisurely winter than if left
until the time they are needed. Work out some
simple irrigation system for the garden and make
as many feet of V-shape wooden trough as you will
need to distribute water, without having to do a lot
of carpentering work next summer when the dry spell
comes and you need all your spare time to weed and
cultivate.
Make a lot of tent-shaped covers, open at the bot-
tom, with the two ends and back of wood and the
front of a single pane of window glass. These de-
vices will enable you to have melons long before your
neighbours by making early planting possible. Put
one of these covers over a newly planted hill with
the glass side toward the sun, and the soil where
the seed is will be much warmer than the surround-
ing ground. These forcing devices can be kept over
the plants until danger of cold is past; then the
melon vines will have a flying start of two weeks.
322
CHAPTER XXX
®
SUGEESTIONS FOR THE GARDEN
CALENDAR
JANUARY.
Wartcu the thermometer in the hotbed. If it runs
low bank up the bed with fresh manure.
Now is the time to cut scions from your favourite
apple trees for grafting on the old trees of poor va-
rieties. In a couple of seasons you can change the
old to the new.
Watch for bare spots on the lawn during severe
weather. Cover with snow or straw to protect the
sod.
Trim the old canes of the raspberries and black-
berries, leaving enough new growth to hold up the
bushes. Cut out about half of the tops of the
gooseberry and currant bushes, saving the new wood.
Sow in the hotbed or flats early cabbage and cauli-
flower, celery of the self-blanching type, onion seed
323
GARDEN CALENDAR
of the large globe sorts. Late in March these may
be removed to the cold frames to harden off.
Sow lettuce, radish, beets, and put in onion sets
in the hotbed for early table supply. Keep the hot-
bed filled by planting new crops when any of the
earlier lettuce or radishes are pulled.
Grafts on cherry and plum may be made now.
Use the liquid grafting wax in cold weather.
FEBRUARY.
If the season is mild uncover bulb beds and hardy
border plants in sections in the latitude of Indian-
apolis and southward. In more northerly regions
wait until March 15th.
When the soil thaws put in a trench of rich manure
a foot deep, with six inches of rich loam over it, and
plant the sweet peas in this loam.
Well-rotted stable manure may now be applied over
the garden plat to soak in as the ground thaws.
Don’t add lime now, but save that until after the
ground is ploughed or spaded. Lime should not be
added with stable manure.
Examine all of your fruit trees closely for scale.
If you find the tell-tale circles about the size of a
324
GARDEN CALENDAR
pin head prepare to fight the San José scale. Whale-
oil soap will kill it and a pound in two gallons of
water and a scrub brush are all you need to do the
cleaning.
Finish pruning the grapes and brambles.
MARCH.
The last chance to prune is during the first mild
days. To delay is to rob the trees of the strength
used in forcing out leaves on the useless limbs.
Uncover the bulb beds, mulch the surface with fine-
cut litter or sand if the soil is full of clay.
Spray trees, shrubs and rose bushes for scale in-
sects.
Clean off the strawberry beds. Transplant hardy
vegetables, such as cabbage and cauliflower. Put
out onion sets and early peas and radishes and beets
in the open ground.
Put out the dahlias and gladioli in borders and
beds in protected places where the sun strikes.
Dig the trenches and put in the sweet peas six to
eight inches deep with plenty of well-rotted manure.
Watch the hotbeds and cold-frames especially at
this time. Sudden rains, hail, changes of tempera-
325
GARDEN CALENDAR
ture, frost and alternating clouds and sunshine may do
great damage within a short while. Hence one must
not forget to adopt the frame to meet these changes.
The best protection against hail is to cover the
glass with a straw mattress or a couple of layers of
old carpet.
Finish your early spraying before the trees have
pushed their buds so far as to be injured by strong
mixtures.
APRIL.
There is no more planting to be done this season
under glass or indoors, except perhaps a supple-
mentary planting of tomato seed. Thin out pep-
pers, eggplants and tomatoes in cold-frame.
Get potato seed cut and ready to go into ground.
This is not too early to plant them.
Plant beets and parsnips and put out the onion sets.
Cut brush or prepare a stout trellis of twine for
the pea vines to cling to. Do not use wire.
Be ready for the blossom-time spraying of the
peach trees with arsenate of lead. Apply when
the petals begin to drop, to catch the curculio.
Sow good grass seed on the bare patches in the
lawn. ‘There are varieties of seed specially adapted
326
GARDEN CALENDAR
to different purposes — that is, for shady places,
damp places and dry spots. Get the right kind.
Begin the watering of the sweet-pea bed, first dis-
solving an ounce of nitrate of soda in a gallon of
water. Plant lettuce, carrots, spinach, early cab-
bage and early cauliflower seed.
MAY.
Make the first planting of string beans and start
a new row of peas to follow those which should be
well along by this time.
Experiment with companion cropping as a means
of getting the maximum food product from the gar-
den by intensive methods. One good combination in-
cludes lettuce, cabbage and radish.
Early turnips can go in now.
Make the first planting of six-week bush beans.
Get the poles set for the limas. A foot and a half
in the ground is none too deep to make them secure
against winds. Also save time by forking manure
into the hills where the limas are to be placed.
Keep a garden diary. Careful noting of what is
happening in your garden from day to day this sea-
son will be of great help to you next year as a guide
and basis of comparison.
327
GARDEN CALENDAR
It is thinning-out time for the vegetables that were
planted early.
Put a very light dressing of nitrate beside the
lettuce plants and rake it in. This will force leaf
growth and help the heading up.
Start another row of peas for the succession.
Plant melon and summer-squash seed.
Use the hoe every day to keep out the weeds and
keep in the moisture. From now on rain is a doubt-
ful quantity.
JUNE.
This is the time to start the herbs, either as bor-
ders or in a patch by themselves.
There is still ample time for another planting in
the succession of peas to give them a start before
wilting hot weather begins.
Spring rains have been as beneficial to the weeds —
as to your vegetables. Use the hoe.
Spray for plant lice. |
Plant cucumbers in richly manured hills of sandy
loam.
Thin out the beets, carrots and lettuce, and give
all the remaining plants in the rows a thorough cul-
tivation.
328
GARDEN CALENDAR
Do a little hand work in pulling out those spears of
grass and young weeds that are getting ready to
choke the new corn.
Plant more six-week beans for the next instalment
of the all-summer succession.
Set in the open ground the hot-weather plants —
tomatoes, peppers and eggplants.
For the next two months mow the lawn once a week
unless there is a drought. If the ground is poor
the cuttings left on the lawn will help to enrich it. If
the turf is good the cuttings will be appreciated in
the poultry yard or they may be used as a mulch
in the berry patch to keep the fruit clean.
Tie the young tomato plants to the stakes now.
The less swaying they do in the wind the better for
them.
First peas are about ready to pick through the
central part of the country. Get rid of the vines as
fast as they are through to make room for other vege-
tables. The gardener in Maine expects to have his
first peas with salmon on July 4.
Spray the melon vines for blight.
329
GARDEN CALENDAR
JULY.
Start another row of sweet corn; also more beans,
peas and lettuce.
Mulch the small fruits and thin the fruit on trees
if there is too much left for the best results after
the natural dropping of June is over.
Dig some wood ashes into the soil round the squash
and melon vines. This will furnish an extra supply
of potash, very useful just now in making fruit.
Pinch back the ends of the vines.
Don’t let any weeds go to seed. It would mean
more work than necessary next year.
Plant seed for late lettuce and spinach.
Go bug hunting every morning in both the flower
and vegetable gardens.
This is the season for pruning many of the flower-
ing shrubs.
AUGUST.
Examine the roses carefully and cut out all old
wood — the wood that has just finished flowering.
After thinning and pruning roses, a good applica-
tion of liquid manure or powdered sheep manure will
help them greatly.
330
GARDEN CALENDAR
If the chrysanthemums have not already been
staked no time should be lost in doing this. A stake
to each shoot, loosely tied, will insure big blooms and
avoid loss from wind storms.
Get evergreens from the nurseryman for the per-
manent planting about the grounds. August is the
month for setting them out.
Cultivate the home orchard once and then sow a
cover crop of clover.
Make the new strawberry plantation from the
potted layers.
If the onion tops begin to droop that is the sign
to take in the harvest.
Hoe the celery for the last cultivation prelim-
inary to banking up.
SEPTEMBER.
Get your planks ready for the blanching of the
celery. :
Thin out the dead wood on the fruit bushes.
There is still time for starting the new straw-
berry patch from the plants produced by the run-
ners of the old one.
Sow turnips, beets and carrots and get ready for
planting the spinach.
331
GARDEN CALENDAR
Gain a year by renovating your lawn this fall.
Cheesecloth covered frames over late crops will
lengthen the growing. season.
Seed a permanent pasture if you have a patch on
which you can keep a cow.
Cut out all old wood of the blackberry and rasp-
berry vines. Leave about four new canes to each
plant. |
Root the cuttings from the geraniums and other
bedding plants to get a new supply for next year.
Pinch back the chrysanthemums.
OCTOBER.
The onion crop should all be harvested, dried and
stored by this time. The winter’s potato supply
should be in the cellar.
Plant lettuce under glass.
Before moving the tender flowering plants back
to winter shelter see that they are free from insects.
New beds of rhubarb and asparagus can be started
now. |
Finish the banking up of celery and endive.
Rake up the leaves for a mulch wherever needed
in the garden. |
332
GARDEN CALENDAR
Cover the strawberry vines.
October is the month for planting the fall bulbs.
It is also the month for digging, drying’ and storing
the bulbs to be planted in spring.
Clean up and burn all garden clutter and diseased
plants.
Burn asparagus tops and manure the bed.
Spread well-rotted manure over the lawn.
Start parsley in the kitchen window garden.
INDEX
Apples, diseases, 139.
fertilizer, 140.
pruning, 134, 136.
soil, 131.
spacing trees, 133.
spraying, 138.
Alfalfa, 230.
Asparagus, cutting, 102.
enemies, 103.
fertilizer, 101, 230.
ideal soil, 96.
making bed, 98,
year-old roots, 96.
Asters, 299.
Barberry, 264.
Beans, culture rules, 84.
fertilizer, 159.
soil, 159.
succession, 160.
Beets, culture rules, 82.
fertilizer, 216.
soil, 216.
Begonia, 294.
Blackberry, fertilizer, 125.
spacing bushes, 120.
Brussels sprouts, 82.
Bulbs, 293.
Cabbage, culture rules, 82.
fertilizer, 150.
pests, 149.
soil, 149.
Canna, 294.
Canning, 189.
Canterbury Bells, 299.
Carrots, culture rules, 83.
fertilizer, 217.
soil, 216.
Cauliflower, 83, 150.
Celery, cultivation, 108.
blanching, 108.
enemies, 111.
fertilizer, 105.
soil, 103.
spraying, 111.
storing, 279.
transplanting, 107.
Cherries, 140.
Chili Sauce, 236.
Chrysanthemum, 299,
Clovers, 230.
Companion cropping, 147.
Corn, best soil, 154.
cross breeding, 154.
culture rule, 85.
fertilizer, 153.
Saving seed, 155.
tillage, 158.
Crocuses, 295.
Cucumbers, 85, 168, 169.
Currants, 121, 124,
Daffodils, 295.
Dahlias, 294.
Dewberries, 119.
Diseases, 38.
Dogwood, 259, 264,
Drainage, 39.
335
INDEX
Dwarf fruit trees, apples, 128.
peaches, 129.
pears, 128.
Early and Late, 222.
Earliana tomatoes, 177.
Egg plant, 5, 85, 178.
Endive, 83, 223.
Fertilizer best adapted for:
apples, 140.
asparagus, 101, 230.
beans, 159.
beets, 216.
blackberries, 125.
cabbage, 150.
carrot, 217.
cauliflower, 150.
celery, 105.
cherries, 140.
corn, 153.
cucumber, 168.
currants, 124.
egg plant, 178.
endive, 225.
gooseberries, 124.
grapes, 292.
lawn grass, 252.
lettuce, 144, 145.
melons, 164, 167.
onions, 113.
peaches, 140.
peanuts, 187.
pears, 140.
peppers, 178.
plums, 140.
potatoes, 187, 215.
pumpkins, 188.
quince, 140.
raspberry, 125.
rutabaga, 216.
shrubs, 265.
spinach, 228.
squash, 188.
Fertilizer—Continued
strawberries, 87, 88.
sweet potato, 183.
tomato, 173, 176.
turnip, 216.
Forsythia, 264.
Garden, calendar, 323-333.
carpentering, 321.
diary, 78.
economy of, 12.
eugenics, 38.
fertilizing, 24.
flower garden, 199-209.
fruit garden, 115-125.
mistakes, 69, 70.
of the winter vision, 1.
permanent improvement,
229.
planning, 4.
reading, 7.
soil, 19.
time chart, 86.
tools, 28-37.
Gladiolia, 294,
Golden glow, 208.
Gooseberries, 121, 123, 124.
Gourds, 181.
Grapes, arbour, 283.
cultivation, 287.
cuttings, 286, 287, 283.
fertilizer, 299.
grafting, 290.
layering, 286, 289.
pests, 285.
preserving, 240.
pruning, 284.
Hawthorn, 264.
Hedges, 262.
Hollyhocks, 206.
Honeysuckle, 264.
Humus, 19.
336
INDEX
Hyacinths, 295.
Tris, 201.
Irrigation, 53.
Jonquils, 295.
Kohl-Rabi, 83.
Laurus Benzoin, 264.
Lawn, area, 256.
contour, 248, 256.
fertilizing, 252.
making, 246.
paths, 255.
regrading, 255.
rolling, 254.
seed for, 247, 253.
shade of, 247.
soil, 249, 250.
terrace, 247.
Leek, 83.
Lettuce, best soil, 145.
best variety, 144.
companion cropping, 147.
cultivation, 146.
fertilizer, 144, 145.
heading up, 143.
quickened growth, 145.
seed bed, 145.
thinning out, 145,
Lime, 22, 233.
Loam, 19.
Loquat, 141.
Manure, cow, 201.
hen, 153.
horse, 201.
liquid, 201, 230.
sheep, 202.
Melons, blight, 168.
different types, 166.
fertilizer, 164, 167.
pinching back, 164.
Melons—Continued
planting time, 85.
soil requirements, 163.
tillage, 164.
under glass, 161.
Montbretia, 294.
Mushrooms, 315.
Narcissi, 295.
Onions, culture rules, 83.
fertilizer, 113.
seed, 113.
sets, 113.
soil, 112.
storing, 276.
Parsley, 169.
Parsnip, 83.
Pawpaw, 141.
Peaches, 133, 134, 137, 140.
Peanuts, 184.
Pears, 128, 130, 140.
Peas, 83.
Peony, 299.
Peppers, 85, 178.
Persimmons, 141.
Phlox, 202, 299.
Pickling, 236.
Planting directions, 82-85.
Plums, 140.
Pollination, 311.
Pomegranate, 141.
Potatoes, 16, 17, 84, 187, 213,
915, 278.
Preserving, 236.
Privet, 208.
Pruning, 121, 133, 208.
Pumpkins, 85, 188.
Quinces, 140.
Radish, 1, 84.
Raspberries, 121, 123, 124,
125.
337
Rhubarb, 313.
Roses, 202.
Rose of Sharon, 301.
Rutabaga, 216.
Salsify, 84.
San Jose Scale, 138.
Shrubs, 263.
Spinach, 84, 227, 228.
Spirea, 264,
Spraying mixtures, 138.
INDEX
Squash, 85, 188.
Sweet potato, 183, 275.
Syringa, 302.
Storing vegetables, 274,
Strawberries, 87-94.
Tomatoes, 85, 171-177.
Tools, 28.
Tulips, 296.
Turnips, 84, 216,
Pare ietoret
cpa beseaeaeanene cnmpscarernens
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11